JP6090237B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 includes an arrangement unit that arranges object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, a viewpoint setting unit that sets a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, Generation data generated by a data generation unit having projection setting unit that projects the object data onto a projection plane set based on a viewpoint and generates generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane Generated data storage means for storing
Display control means for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The arrangement means displays the corresponding image when displaying the corresponding image that is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image so as to overlap a part of the second individual image. Corresponding object data that is object data is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from object data for displaying the second individual image ,
The data generation means includes texture setting means for setting texture data for the object data,
The texture setting means, when the display position of the first individual image is changed, the correspondence of the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed A setting position changing means for changing the setting position relationship with respect to the object data is provided .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform display control.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control pattern table. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the command transmitted to the display CPU72 from MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content instruct | indicated by each command data. It is a flowchart which shows the command selection process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed with display CPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a command storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed with display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the pointer information of an execution object table is adjusted in relation to a task process. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the color change effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the memory module for performing a color change effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a color palette. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the color change effect performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the color change effect performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the write-in process for the color change effect performed with VDP. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect production. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the effect production performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the effect production performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the write processing for the effect production performed by VDP. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a development effect. It is a time chart which shows a mode that an expansion effect is performed using each image data for effects. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the expansion effect performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the expansion effect performed in VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating simultaneous display effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing simultaneous display effect, (c) The effect image for increase is displayed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the image data for normal effects and the image data for simple effects are used properly as image data for displaying the effect image for increase. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for simultaneous display effects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for simultaneous display effects performed with VDP. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced with execution of a drawing process. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a loop production. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing a loop effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mixing | blending table. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a loop effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the loop production performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for interpolation display periods performed with display CPU. It is a time chart which shows the timing which derivation | leading-out of the coordinate data by a mixing | blending is started about A character for loop effects, and B character for loop effects. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the loop production performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a pre-start object determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for interpolation display periods performed with display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a bone model display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing a bone model display. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating frame | skeleton data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for coordinate calculation. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the bone model display effects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the coordinate calculation process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the bone model display effects performed with VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a set character group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the skeleton data of each set unit character. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount of the character for bone | frame display, and a set unit character. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the bone animation data for aggregation. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement content of each set unit character. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a plane shadow display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a data structure required in order to perform a plane shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for plane shadow display performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for plane shadow display performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of another form of a plane shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for plane shadow display performed with display CPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of level | step difference shadow display, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure required in order to perform level | step difference shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for level | step difference shadow display performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the step shadow display performed in VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a variable display effect, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the area utilized when performing the variable display effect in the expansion | deployment buffer of VRAM. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the variable display effects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the fluctuation | variation display effects performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for the variable display effects performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing data of the symbol display part preserve | saved at each preservation | save buffer. (A)-(e) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the drawing data of the image for a variable display effect are produced using the drawing data preserve | saved at each buffer for preservation | save. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a distortion background display. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for performing a distortion background display. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for distortion background display performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the distortion background display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the refraction application process performed in VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the special electric prize device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Executed.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a special symbol display unit 37a displays a change or predetermined display of a pattern based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. That is, when variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the display surface P of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface P, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. On the display surface P, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols assigned with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols” and are assigned even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). The main symbol corresponds to “non-specific symbol”. When the 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Further, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 32. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. In the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above-described configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin, and the game area PA is defined through the window panel 43 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a.

  On the back side of the inner frame 13, a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. The back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power source / launch control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main control device 50, a trace box for giving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided to the board box that accommodates the main control board 51 or the like. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 53 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power source / fire control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source / launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power source / launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to a winning-corresponding pitching portion such as a general winning opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and a through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 52 performs a jackpot generation lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and also performs a reach generation lottery and a display continuation time determination lottery for each game time. To do.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 37a, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, display setting of the general symbol display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a hit random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, In the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Furthermore, the universal electric utility release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the electric utility item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in an on-hold storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in

  The holding storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. . Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Specifically, each counter is configured such that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the winning lottery means after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) first after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric utility 34a of the two operation ports 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or winning in the large winning opening Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the big prize opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening Continue until there are six.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. The On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time for opening a single big winning opening is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  It should be noted that the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for opening once, and the opening limit number for opening once are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode increases. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open / close execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, a prize to the special electricity winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. In particular, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32.

  As a support mode for the general electric utility 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the gaming area, The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric utility open state in the electric utility open lottery using the general electric utility open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the general utility 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (e.g., based on a winning to the through gate 35 in the normal map display unit 38a) that is secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the electrification opening lottery In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. As the distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the modes of the probability variation jackpot result are diversified. That is, when two types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the lowest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that is the high-frequency support mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The resulting implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probabilistic jackpot results is achieved.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. However, if one of the results of non-explicit 2R probability change jackpot or special outage occurs in the normal gaming state, for example, it will be It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to.

  The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. Expected effects include a symbol display device 41 that can perform variable display of symbols, and in game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electricity winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is assumed to be in the variable display state in which the special display result is likely to be obtained before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state for this purpose.

  In the expected effect, two types are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display or the generation of a special display result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that are likely to be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there is included a technique for performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  More specifically, the reach display related to the symbol variation display is performed, and as a stage before the symbol variation display is terminated, the high-frequency winning mode is generated on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may have a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol change display by the last stop symbol sequence Is to do.

  The display contents of FIG. 4 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background image the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission controller 60.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to “0”. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 54c at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power source / launch control device 57 is also connected. For example, a payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power / fire control device 57 based on the operation of the firing operation device 28. Based on the launch permission command received from the main controller 50, the power / launch controller 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area.

  Further, a special figure display unit 37 a and a general map display unit 38 a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and display control of the special figure display unit 37 a and the general map display unit 38 a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the electric utility item 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 52 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a.

  Connected to the output side of the MPU 52 are a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the open / close door of the special electric prize device 32 and a universal electric component drive unit that opens and closes the electric utility item 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the special electricity prize driving unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is opened, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the power utility drive unit so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 57 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

  In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to a game stop flag provided in the RAM 54.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electricity prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the special electricity prize driving unit is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set, Stop driving signal output. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the power utility drive unit is started and the information to be switched to the closed state. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, a signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. Execute the process to identify.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208.

  In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 54b in time series is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big win is determined on the condition that the hold information is not stored during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode and is stored. If it corresponds to the process and the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, not only the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the big win, whether the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. A reach determination process is performed, and a process of selecting a game time duration using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of jackpot winning, the type of jackpot, and the presence / absence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the current variation display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing are read from this time. Determine the duration of game times. Then, the variation command including information on the determined duration of the game times and the type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is performed. To start. As a result, one game round is started, and an effect for game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41.

  Also, in the special figure special electric control process, during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. Then, the process of ending the game round is executed. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound light control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is sent to the sound emission control device 60, and the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Execute the process.

  After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interruption process, the normal figure electric power control process is executed in step S214. In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 63 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main controller 50 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 62. That is, the MPU 62 is connected to the display CPU 72 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and commands are exchanged between the MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 by bidirectional communication. The bidirectional communication is performed by serial communication, but is not limited thereto, and may be performed by parallel communication.

  The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game times by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes an effect start process for game times. In addition, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game turn, and the game turn effect end process is executed. Also, by receiving the various jackpot presentation commands transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot presentation needs to be started or advanced, and the jackpot presentation process is executed.

  Note that the MPU 62 receiving a command from the main control device 50 is not limited to a configuration for directly receiving a command from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration for receiving a command relayed to a relay board.

  In the game turn production start process, based on both the change command and the type command, the change display time grasp process for grasping the change display time of the corresponding game turn and the reach display grasp process for grasping the presence or absence of reach display. And a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence / absence of the jackpot result and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs. In addition, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the symbol for determining the kind of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Execute type grasp processing. Then, based on the results of the above grasping processes, a display control device includes a change pattern command including information on the change display time and information on the type of display effect, and a design designation command including information on the type of design to be finally stopped and displayed. 70.

  In addition, in the game turn production start process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the notice display is also executed. If it is determined that the notice display has been generated, a notice command including information on the type of notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  Further, in the game start effect starting process, the game light display light emission table and the game turn sound table are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 during the progress of the corresponding game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game round is defined by the game round voice table.

  In the game round effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game turn effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game turn effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

  In the jackpot presentation process, based on the various commands for the jackpot presentation received, the presentation mode at the opening, at each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot presentation corresponding to the grasped result Is sent to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the jackpot effect and the sound table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. Is specified.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Is done. Note that the display CPU 72 receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 is not limited to a structure that directly receives a command from the sound light emission control device 60, and includes a structure that receives a command relayed to the relay board. It is.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Instruct the transfer. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and performs a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. It is a storage means for storing various image data in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing the control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74, control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. The display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. The VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. The VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing data stored in the development buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a. Since the VDP 76 is an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 76 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a drawing-dedicated firmware.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 in the register 92. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which all the control programs for the control part 91 to operate | move are provided with a drawing list, the memory which memorize | stored the control program previously is built in the control part 91, the content of the said control program and a drawing list, and Thus, the control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 by using (or processing) the image data read out to the development buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b are provided in the frame buffer 82, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 82a or the second frame region 82b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 94. The signal is output to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be output to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. The moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Sound Emission Control Device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) of the sound emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 62.

  First, in step S301, a main-side command handling process is executed to perform a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 (hereinafter referred to as the main-side MPU 52) of the main controller 50. In the subsequent step S302, command selection processing for instructing the display CPU 72 of the contents of display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed in accordance with the control pattern table read out in the main command corresponding process in step S301. In step S304, sound output control processing for performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control pattern table read out in the main-side command handling process in step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control pattern table is updated to the next pointer information. In step S306, a display-side command handling process for executing a process corresponding to the command received from the display CPU 72 is executed.

<Main command processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main-side command response process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round is specified, The specified information is written into the RAM 64.

  In a succeeding step S403, a notice lottery process is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. As the notice display, as already described, since the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is started, the symbols are variably displayed on all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the notice display is displayed. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display may occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  In the subsequent step S404, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 The determined information is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Note that the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can select the combination of the same odd symbol even if it is a normal jackpot result.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1 Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3 · 4 · 1”) is established on L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the specific symbol combination are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and reach on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In subsequent step S405, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, the information on the duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command received this time, the information on the duration, the information on the game result specified in step S402, and the advance notice in step S403. The effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the lottery process and the stop result information determined in step S404 is selected. When selecting the production pattern, the pattern determination table provided in the ROM 63 is referred to, the current duration information, the game result information, the lottery result information of the advance notice lottery process, and the stop result An address in the ROM 63 of the control pattern table corresponding to the information is specified, and the control pattern table is read from the ROM 63 and written in the RAM 64 based on the result of specifying the address.

  The control pattern table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an example of a control pattern table that can be selected when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the control pattern table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the duration of the target game time is set, and information on the contents of the task, corresponding to each pointer information, Information on presence / absence of command output and information on additional data are set.

  The task content information is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game round, and information that does not reflect the task content information at all is not set as additional data As long as each frame, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed in a manner according to the information of the task contents.

  Specifically, with respect to the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. Data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “300”, data at the start of normal reach is set in the pointer information “400”, and data at the start of super reach is set in the pointer information “700”. Data is set, data at the time of starting the definite effect is set in the pointer information “1000”, and data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information “1400”. Each piece of the pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between the division timings is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table, it is possible to associate the content of the image in the symbol display device 41, the content of light emission in the display light emitting unit 44, and the content of sound output in the speaker unit 45. . That is, according to the content of the moving image in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 44 performs the light effect, and the speaker part 45 executes the sound output effect.

  Specifically, for the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, command data is set for the pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the change of game times, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. Also, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which each of the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the confirmed effect and the data at the end of the variation Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of “200”, “400”, “700”, “1000”, and “1400”. Therefore, within the range of effects for the game times that start when a predetermined start trigger occurs that the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect divisions included in the effects for the game times are When the type changes, display control corresponding to the new effect section is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the control pattern table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when a notification execution instruction is given. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image is displayed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. The

  The control pattern table is provided corresponding to the effects in the situation where the effects for the opening / closing execution mode and the effects for the game times and the effects for the opening / closing execution mode are not executed in addition to the effects for the game times. It has been. Since the control pattern table is set corresponding to various situations as described above, some control pattern table is read out to the RAM 64 in a situation where the operating light is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. Yes.

  Returning to the description of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 10), it is determined in step S406 whether or not a notification execution command has been received from the main-side MPU 52. The notification execution command is specified in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 that the predetermined event set as the fraud monitoring target has occurred. And also when the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is specified to be open in the input state monitoring process in step S212. Since the notification execution command includes data corresponding to the content of the notification target, the sound light side MPU 62 can specify the content of the notification target from the received notification execution command.

  When the notification execution command has been received (step S406: YES), the notification start setting process is executed (step S407). In the notification start setting process, data for executing notification corresponding to the current notification execution command is set in additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table. For example, when a notification execution command corresponding to detection of fraud is received, data for performing fraud notification on the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is set as additional data. Further, when a notification execution command corresponding to a state change of the pachinko machine 10 such as opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is received, data for performing the state notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is added data. Set as. Thereby, the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 execute unauthorized notification or status notification. If the control pattern table to be executed is changed after receiving the notification execution command and before receiving the notification release command, the additional data of the newly changed control pattern table The notification data having the same content as that set in the additional data of the immediately preceding control pattern table is set. Thereby, it is possible to continue the notification.

  Thereafter, in step S408, a notification execution command corresponding to the content of the notification execution command received this time is transmitted to the display CPU 72. Thereby, the display control is executed by the display CPU 72 so that the notification image corresponding to the notification execution command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In step S409, it is determined whether a notification release command is received from the main MPU 52 or not. The notification release command is output when it is determined in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 that the state in which the predetermined event has occurred is released. This is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process in step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is closed.

  When the notification release command has been received (step S409: YES), notification release setting processing is executed (step S410). In the notification release setting process, the additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table is cleared to “0”. As a result, the unauthorized notification or status notification executed by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is canceled. Thereafter, in step S411, a notification release command is transmitted to the display CPU 72. Thereby, the display of the notification image on the symbol display device 41 is terminated.

  In the main-side command handling process, in addition to the above processes, other handling processes are executed in step S412. In other handling processing, for example, when a final stop command is received from the main MPU 52, processing for ending the effect for game times is executed. When the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main MPU 52, the opening / closing execution mode is used. The process for ending the production is executed. Further, in a situation where neither the game-turn effect or the opening / closing execution mode effect is executed, the control pattern table for executing the standby effect is read.

<Command selection processing>
Next, the command selection process executed in step S302 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. Prior to the description of the command selection process, the contents of the command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the command.

  The command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 has a data structure of a plurality of bytes. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 are included. The first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 have the same number of bytes, specifically 1 byte each. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each command data CD1 to CD3 may have a plurality of bytes.

  In each of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3, the upper 2 bits have a function as identification bits, and the remaining 6 bits have a function as data bits. In the identification bit, data indicating whether its own command data is the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, or the third command data CD3 is set. Specifically, “01” is set in the identification bit of the first command data CD1, as shown in FIG. 12A, and the identification bit of the second command data CD2 is set in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, “10” is set, and “11” is set in the identification bit of the third command data CD3 as shown in FIG.

  In the data bit, data corresponding to the instruction content from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is set. In the data bit of the first command data CD1, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the first type as the outline content of the instruction content is set. Specifically, in the case of a command for instructing execution of an effect, data on the type of effect executed in the effect for game times, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the effect in standby is set and the notification is executed. If it is a command instructing, data indicating which of fraud notification and status notification is an execution target is set.

  In the data bit of the second command data CD2, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the second type included in the first type specified by the first command data CD1 is set. Further, in the data bit of the third command data CD3, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the third type included in the second type specified by the second command data CD2 is set.

  With reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 13, taking as an example a command for instructing execution of an effect, what contents are instructed by each of the command data CD1 to CD3 will be described.

  As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, a notice display can be generated as an effect for game times. The notice display is performed when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol rows and the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows. It is an effect that is performed in a situation where there is a notice display more easily than when the reach display is not performed, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are the game times corresponding to the losing result In comparison, the notice display is more likely to occur. A plurality of types of notice display are set, and a step-up notice and a conversation notice are set as a part thereof.

  A step-up notice is an effect that is executed in stages, and a reach display is performed depending on the combination of the number of stages to be executed, the display color of characters displayed when the effect is executed, and the type of the notice character to be displayed. The degree of expectation that will be generated and the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur are suggested The conversation notice is an effect in which a display is made as if a conversation is being performed between the first notice character and the second notice character, and the content of the conversation to be executed, the display color of the character of the conversation, The combination of the types of the first notice character and the second notice character to be displayed suggests the degree of expectation that the reach display is performed and the degree of expectation that the jackpot result is generated.

  When the first command data CD1 is expressed as a hexadecimal number and is “41”, it corresponds to a step-up notice. In the case of step-up notice, the second command data CD2 indicates which of the number of stages, the character color, or the notice character is to be indicated, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command data CD2. The specific contents of the instruction target are instructed. In this case, the content instructed by one type of command is only one type among the plurality of types of second type content included in the step-up notice. That is, when executing the step-up notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 of the number of stages, the character color, and the kind of notice character. However, depending on one kind of command, only one type of second type content is required. Is instructed. Therefore, in order to instruct the execution of the step-up notice, it is necessary to transmit the commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 for the content type of the second type, specifically three types. The sound light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 when the transmission of the three types of commands is instructed to execute the step-up notice. The end command has a data structure that is not used in other commands. Specifically, it is “FF” in hexadecimal. When receiving the end command, the display CPU 72 specifies that the transmission of the command group that is the current instruction target is completed. As a result, even if a plurality of types of commands composed of the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted in order to instruct execution of the step advance notice, it is displayed that all reception of these commands has been completed. The CPU 72 can clearly grasp it.

  When the first command data CD1 is expressed as a hexadecimal number and is “42”, it corresponds to the conversation notice. In the case of a conversation notice, the second command data CD2 instructs the content of the conversation, the character color, which of the first notice character and the second notice character is to be designated, and the second command data CD3 designates the second command. The specific contents of the instruction target indicated by the data CD2 are instructed. In this case, as in the case of the step-up notice, in the case of the conversation notice, only one type of content is designated by one type of command among a plurality of types of second type contents included in the conversation notice. In other words, when executing the conversation notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 of the content of the conversation, the character color, and the first notice character and the second notice character, but one kind of command is used for one kind. Only the contents of the second type are instructed. Therefore, in order to instruct execution of the conversation notice, it is necessary to transmit the commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 for the content type of the second type, specifically four types. The sound light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 as in the case of the step-up notification when transmission of the four types of commands is completed in order to instruct execution of the conversation notification. As a result, even when a plurality of types of commands including the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted in order to instruct execution of the conversation notice, it is displayed that all the commands have been received. The CPU 72 can clearly grasp it. In addition, even if the total number of commands transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 is different between the step-up notice and the conversation notice, an end command is transmitted when transmission of all commands corresponding to each effect is completed. Thus, the display CPU 72 can clearly grasp that the reception of all the commands corresponding to each effect has been completed.

  In order to indicate the contents of a plurality of types of second types even when instructing the execution of other effects, a plurality of types of commands are transmitted when a command for instructing execution of a predetermined effect is transmitted. When is completed, an end command is transmitted. In addition, there is an effect in which the content of the second type is only one type, but when instructing the execution of the effect, one type of command including each command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted and the transmission is completed. If it does, send an end command. The sound light side MPU 62 finally transmits an end command not only when a command for instructing execution of an effect but also a command for instructing execution of a notification is transmitted. Thereby, the display CPU 72 can grasp whether or not the reception of the command from the sound light side MPU 62 for giving a predetermined instruction is completed depending on whether or not the end command is received.

  When the sound-side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the contents of the notice display executed in a predetermined period, the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are associated with the contents of the second stage included in the notice display. Multiple types of commands are sent. As a result, even when the number of types in the second stage is increased or decreased, or even when the contents of the second stage are changed, it is sufficient to change the command in units of the corresponding second stage. Simplification is achieved.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted in a one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the second type in this way, even if one command is rewritten during transmission due to the influence of noise, etc. It is possible to limit the influence to the content of one type of the second type.

  By adopting a configuration in which the instruction contents are determined step by step by a plurality of command data CD1 to CD3, even when the contents instructed from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 are diversified, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 Command design can be facilitated.

  The data used as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing execution of the conversation notice. The data used as each of the command data CD1 to CD3 is stored in the ROM 63 in advance, but the data used as the second command data CD2 and the data used as the third command data CD3 are as described above. Since the configuration is used in common for a plurality of types of commands, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required to store command data in the ROM 63.

  Hereinafter, command selection processing executed by the sound light side MPU 62 in order to transmit the command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When data indicating the transmission timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table (step S501: YES), the command at the current transmission timing is determined from the control pattern table. The number of types is read, and a value corresponding to the number of types is set in a command type number counter provided in the RAM 64 (step S502). After that, the address data of the command area of the ROM 63 designated in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table, and the address data corresponding to the value of the current command type counter is specified. Then, in accordance with the specified address data, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 are read from the ROM 63 (steps S503 to S505), and the command data CD1 to CD3 are read out. The target area is set in a ring buffer provided in the RAM 64 (step S506). The sound light side MPU 62 sequentially reads out the commands set in the ring buffer and transmits them to the display CPU 72 in transmission interrupt processing that is started periodically (for example, 1 msec) separately from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). In this case, the commands set in the ring buffer are transmitted in order from the earliest timing.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the command type number counter (step S507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the command type number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S508). If it is not “0”, the processing from step S503 to step S506 is executed for the command corresponding to the value of the updated command type number counter. If it is “0”, in step S509, an end command is read from the ROM 63 and set in the ring buffer.

<Processing configuration of display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output with respect to the last dot, so that the display CPU 72 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed in step S601. In the command analysis process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, it is determined in step S701 whether a new command has been received from the sound light side MPU 62 or not. When the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the sound side MPU 62, the command interrupt processing is started with the highest priority regardless of the processing being executed at that time, and the command received at the input port 77 is displayed. And stored in the command storage buffer 101 provided in the work RAM 73.

  More specifically, the command storage buffer 101 includes a first unprocessed area 102, a second unprocessed area 103, and a third unprocessed area 104, as shown in FIG. Each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 includes five command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e. Each of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e can store one type of command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. The data structure is 3 bytes. In addition, the number of command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e provided in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is such that the execution instruction for the production or the notification execution instruction is performed once from the sound light side MPU 62. The maximum number of commands sent when Thereby, in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104, it is possible to store a command group transmitted in response to a single execution instruction for execution and a command group transmitted in response to a single notification execution instruction. The number of unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of command groups that can stand by in the unprocessed state in the display CPU 72. As a result, in a configuration in which an unprocessed command group can stand by, it is possible to prevent execution omission of processing corresponding to the command group.

  In the command interruption process, when a command is newly received since the end command was received last time, and an unprocessed command group is not stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the first unprocessed area 102. And when the unprocessed command group is stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the second unprocessed area 103, and the unprocessed command group is stored in the second unprocessed area 103. If stored, the command is stored in the third unprocessed area 104. Until the end command is received, each time a command is received, command storage processing for the command storage area of the unprocessed area to be stored is sequentially executed. When the end command is received, the unprocessed area for storing the command is set as the next sequential area. In the command interruption process, when a process for storing a command is executed, it is possible to specify in which of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e the command is stored in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104. Set the data to

  Returning to the description of the command analysis processing (FIG. 16A), in step S701, it is determined whether or not storage of commands in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 has been newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, “1” is set to a receiving flag provided in the work RAM 73 in order to specify in the display CPU 72 whether or not a command group is being received. When the process of step S702 is executed, or when the receiving flag is set to “1” (step S703: YES), it is determined whether an end command is received in step S704. If an end command has been received (step S704: YES), the value of the unprocessed counter provided in the work RAM 73 is incremented by 1 (step S705), and the receiving flag is cleared to “0” (step S706).

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), after the command analysis process is executed in step S601, the value of the unprocessed counter in the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S602: YES). In step S603, command response processing is executed. In step S604, the value of the unprocessed counter is decremented by one. The command handling process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a process for reading a command to be processed this time is executed (step S801). Specifically, the command stored in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101 of the work RAM 73 is written in the area for the command to be processed in the work RAM 73. When the writing is executed, each data in the third unprocessed area 104 is written to the second unprocessed area 104 after the data in the second unprocessed area 103 is overwritten on the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101. The processing area 103 is overwritten.

  Thereafter, a value corresponding to the number of types of commands to be processed this time is set in a processing target counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S802). Thereafter, the reference table corresponding to the first command data CD1 in the command to be processed this time is read from the memory module 74 (step S803). The reference table is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the data content of the first command data CD1, and specifies a display pattern table for executing image display corresponding to the command to be processed on the symbol display device 41. Data to do is set.

  The reference table RT when the data corresponding to the step-up notice is set in the first command data CD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the reference table RT, the addresses of the execution target tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence with all combinations of the third type types that can occur for all the second type types in the step-up notice. For example, when the type of the second type is “number of stages”, the type of the third type is “2”, and when the type of the second type is “character color”, the type of the third type is “red”. When the second type is “notice character” and the third type is “24th character”, the address of the second stage red 24 table in the reference table RT is the address of the execution target table. It is set as an address.

  The execution target table displays an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to one command group transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for making it happen is determined. In the execution target table, pointer information corresponding to the number of update timings included in the moving image display period of the execution target table is set, and the update timing corresponding to the pointer information is associated with each pointer information. Data for enabling the display of an image is set.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 17), after reading the reference table in step S803, the value of the current process target counter among the commands written in the process target command area of the work RAM 73 in step S801. And the data corresponding to the combination of the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 in the command is written in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S804). The value of the processing target counter has a one-to-one correspondence with the command storage areas 102a to 102e of the first unprocessed area 102. The command written in the command area is set as the data read target.

  After executing the processing in step S804, the value of the processing target counter is decremented by 1 in step S805. In step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process of step S804 is executed for the command corresponding to the updated processing target counter value. If it is “0”, an execution target table read process is executed in step S807. In the read process, the address of the execution target table corresponding to the data read to the register of the display CPU 72 in step S804 is specified from the reference table read in step S803, and the area of the specified address in the memory module 74 is specified. The stored execution target table is read into the work RAM 73. Thereby, the reading of the execution target table corresponding to the command to be processed is completed, and the moving image corresponding to the command to be processed can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Incidentally, execution for executing fraud notification or status notification in a situation where display control based on an execution target table for executing effects such as effects for game times, effects for opening / closing execution mode and standby effects is being executed. When the target table is read, the notification execution target table is read to the work RAM 73 while the work execution target table that has already been read is stored in the work RAM 73. Then, in task processing (FIG. 19) described later, arithmetic processing that enables display of images corresponding to both of the execution target tables is executed, and in pointer update processing (step S607) described later, each pointer of the execution target tables. Update information.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), if the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly set in the command response process in step S603 (step S605: YES), or for fraud notification Alternatively, even when the state notification execution target table is not newly set (step S605: NO), “1” is set in the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 (step S606: YES). In step S607, pointer update processing is executed, and the calculation completion flag is cleared to “0”. In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to pointer information corresponding to the next update timing. In step S607 immediately after the execution target table is newly set in the command corresponding process (step S603), the pointer information update process is executed so that the pointer information corresponds to the first update timing. The calculation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 72 whether or not various calculation processes for displaying an image corresponding to one update timing have been completed in the previous process execution time of the V interrupt process. is there.

  After executing the processing in step S607, task processing is executed in step S608. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, calculation of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 76 is performed. Specifically, the drawing is performed using the address information of the area where the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data to be controlled. Information on the target frame regions 82a and 82b for which data is to be created, information on the coordinates when writing the control target image data in the target frame regions 82a and 82b, information on the scale when writing the image data, and Information on a uniform α value (translucent value) when writing image data is included.

  Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed in step S609. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is set as a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 76, drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

  The task processing in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the in-delay flag provided in the work RAM 73. In the task process, various calculation processes such as a background calculation process, an effect calculation process, and a symbol calculation process are executed as will be described in detail later. In this case, the period required for executing various arithmetic processes varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the type of individual images, and the display mode of the individual images. As a result of the fluctuation of the period, it may occur that the next processing time of the V interrupt processing should be started before the execution of all the arithmetic processing is completed in the task processing. In this case, when waiting for the execution of the V interrupt process, the display CPU 72 cannot quickly cope with the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62. Therefore, when it is time to start the next processing time of the V interrupt processing during the execution of the task processing, the task processing is not continued as it is, but a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started. It has become. However, when starting a new processing time of the V interrupt processing, the operation result of the task processing at that time is stored and held, and the arithmetic processing is performed from the middle of the operation in the task processing of the V interrupt processing of the new processing time. By restarting, the calculation processing for one update timing is not left unexecuted. As a result, for example, in a configuration in which the parameter update for displaying a predetermined individual image is controlled by the difference from the previous update value, the parameter update is skipped once, and the subsequent parameter update cannot be performed accurately. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as. The in-delay flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 72 whether or not the execution of various arithmetic processes in the task process is temporarily suspended and delayed as described above. The individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data and one sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data.

  When “1” is not set in the delay flag (step S901: NO), a setting process for starting control is executed (step S902). In the control start setting process, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Reserve a free buffer area. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  In subsequent step S903, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  After that, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, and after the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately subsequent step S905, the background calculation process is executed (step S906). In the background calculation process, the current control update target is grasped among the rearmost still image and the background sprite constituting the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates in the virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S907, and new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in step S908 immediately thereafter, and then the effect calculation process is executed (step S909). In the effect calculation process, the current control update target is grasped among effect sprites constituting an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect. Further, the various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  After that, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S910, and after a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S911, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S912). In the symbol computation process, the current control update target is grasped from symbols subject to variable display in each game round. Further, the various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  Incidentally, in each calculation process of step S906, step S909, and step S912, animation data set so as to change various parameter information of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing comes. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. In the symbol calculation process, when the execution table for fraud notification or state notification is read to the work RAM 73, the calculation process for displaying a notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

  Thereafter, in step S913, “1” is set to a calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify that the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and the symbol calculation process in step S912 are each performed once.

  Thereafter, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed in step S914. In the drawing instruction target grasping process, among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the calculation processes in steps S906, S909, and S912, the drawing instruction object is included in the image for one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction. The process which grasps | ascertains the individual image to be performed is performed. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to coordinates, rotation angles, and scale information of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, it is necessary to select individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by making the individual images specified in the drawing list not only all individual images for which control has been started, but only individual images to be displayed. In addition, even if it is not selected, there is no need to perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets. Thereby, the processing load of the VDP 76 can be reduced.

  Here, when a new processing time of the V interrupt process is started, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, but the background calculation process in step S906 and the effect calculation process in step S909 are prohibited. In addition, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted at each timing before the symbol calculation process of step S912 is executed (steps S904, S907, and S910). As a result, when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, the start timing of the new V interrupt processing is reached, that is, 20 msec has already elapsed since the start of the current V interrupt processing. If so, the task process is interrupted at that time, and a new process time of the V interrupt process is started, and the process of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is awaited in spite of the start timing of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing.

  However, even if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started in this way, data corresponding to the processing result up to this time in the task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the interruption address area 111 is referred to at the start of task processing in the V interrupt processing of a new processing time, so that execution of processing is resumed from the timing at which interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, when the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, step S907, and step S910, the background calculation process in step S906 is performed after the new activation is prohibited in step S905, step S908, and step S911. The effect calculation process in step S909 and the symbol calculation process in step S912 are executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processing. If a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the amount of data in the middle of the operation to be stored will be extremely large. The content of the address data when returning to a state in the middle of processing in a complicated processing time may be complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting new activation of the V interrupt process before various arithmetic processes are started, a new processing time of the V interrupt process is not started in the middle of various arithmetic processes. It becomes possible.

  If a new processing time of the V interrupt process is started during the execution of the task process, the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) is executed without executing the process of setting “1” to the calculation completion flag in step S913. The process of step S601 is started. Then, a negative determination is made in step S606, assuming that “1” is not set in the calculation completion flag. In this case, “1” is set to the in-delay flag of the work RAM 73 in step S610.

  When “1” is set in the delay flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S901 in the subsequent task processing (FIG. 19). In this case, after the delay flag is cleared to “0” (step S 915), the address data is read from the interruption address area 111 of the work RAM 73, thereby starting a new processing time of the V interrupt processing in the previous task processing. The process jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before (step S916). As a result, the execution of the process can be resumed from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task process.

  In the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), when a negative determination is made in step S606, a delay command is further transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62 (step S611). The delay command includes pointer information data in the current execution target table. The process when the sound light side MPU 62 receives the delay command is executed in the display side command corresponding process in step S306 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, when a delay command is received (step S1001: YES), pointer information of the execution target table is read from the currently received delay command (step S1002). Thereafter, the display CPU 72 corresponds to the occurrence of the update timing delay based on the pointer information of the control pattern table read to the RAM 64 of the sound emission control device 60 and the pointer information read from the delay command. The pointer range for the delay is calculated (step S1003).

  Since the output timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the control pattern table, it is possible to derive the pointer information at the timing when the execution instruction of the effect corresponding to the current execution target table in the display CPU 72 is given. is there. Further, although the cycle in which the pointer information in the control pattern table is updated in the sound light side MPU 62 is different from the cycle in which the pointer information in the execution target table is updated in the display CPU 72, these cycles are predetermined cycles. It becomes almost constant. The sound light side MPU 62 can derive the original pointer information of the execution target table when the task processing is not interrupted in the display CPU 72 from the current pointer information of the control pattern table. Then, from the difference between the derived pointer information and the pointer information grasped from the delay command of the display CPU 72, it is necessary to match the progress of control in the sound light side MPU 62 with the progress of control in the display CPU 72. It is possible to derive a subtraction value of the pointer information of the control pattern table.

  In step S1004, the derived subtraction value is subtracted from the current pointer information in the control pattern table to execute adjustment processing of the pointer information. As a result, even if the task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72 and the update of the pointer information in the execution target table is delayed, the pointer information in the control pattern table in the sound light side MPU 62 is delayed. It is possible to correspond to the pointer information of the target table.

  The manner in which the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to the task processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21A shows the start timing of the V interrupt process, FIG. 21B shows the execution period of the task process, FIG. 21C shows the update timing of the pointer information in the execution target table, and FIG. FIG. 21E shows the timing at which the display CPU 72 receives the notification execution command from the sound light side MPU 62. In the following description, it is assumed that the pointer information is updated at the timing when the processing time of the V interrupt processing is newly started, but actually the timing after the processing time of the V interrupt processing is newly started. The pointer information is updated at a timing before the task processing is started. The same applies to the output timing of the delay command.

  First, a case where an interruption occurs in the middle of task processing and a notification execution command has not been received in the middle of the task processing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t1. In this case, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. Thereafter, task processing is started at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 21B, and the task processing ends at a timing t3 which is a timing before a new start timing (timing t4) of the V interrupt processing. To do. In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started at the timing t4, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21C. Then, the task processing is started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. However, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new start timing of the V interrupt processing is obtained at the timing of t6 during the execution of the task processing. In this case, the currently executed task process is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing time of the V interrupt process is started.

  At the timing of t6, even if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated. As a result, the task processing is started without updating the pointer information in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time, so the data corresponding to the pointer information set in the previous processing time of the V interrupt processing is used. It is possible to execute the task processing. Further, at the timing of t6, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. Thereby, in a situation where the update of the pointer information in the execution target table of the display CPU 72 is delayed, the pointer information in the control pattern table of the sound light side MPU 62 can be adjusted in accordance with the delay.

  Next, a case will be described in which task processing is interrupted and a notification execution command is received during the task processing.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started at the timing t9, and pointer information in the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. Then, the task processing is started at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. However, as shown in FIG. 21A, a new start timing of the V interrupt processing is obtained at the timing t12 during the execution of the task processing. In this case, the currently executed task process is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing time of the V interrupt process is started.

  However, after the timing of t10 which is the start timing of the task processing to be interrupted, and before the timing of t12 which is the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing, At the timing, the notification execution is received from the sound light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the task processing is interrupted at the timing t12 and a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, the delay command is not transmitted.

  Thereafter, the task processing is started at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. In the task process, since the operation corresponding to the data for one piece of pointer information is not executed in the execution target table for the effect for the various operation processes for the effect, the setting of the various parameter information is performed normally. There is a possibility that the image display for production is not smoothly performed due to the fact that it is not performed. On the other hand, since various calculation processes for notification are started in the task process, display of a notification image can be started immediately. Thereafter, the task processing ends at a timing t14 which is a timing before a new activation timing (timing t15) of the V interrupt processing. In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

  When a new processing time of the V interrupt process is started, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited. However, the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and step S912 are performed. At each timing before the symbol calculation process is executed, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted (steps S904, S907, and S910). As a result, when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, the start timing of the new V interrupt processing is reached, that is, 20 msec has already elapsed since the start of the current V interrupt processing. If so, the task process is interrupted at that time, and a new process time of the V interrupt process is started, and the process of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is awaited in spite of the start timing of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing.

  However, even if a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started in this way, data corresponding to the processing result up to this time in the task processing is stored and held as it is. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt process is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the interruption address area 111 is referred to at the start of task processing in the V interrupt processing of a new processing time, so that execution of processing is resumed from the timing at which interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

  If new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, step S907, and step S910, the new activation is prohibited in step S905, step S908, and step S911, and then the background calculation process in step S906 is performed. The effect calculation process in S909 and the symbol calculation process in step S912 are executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processing. If a new processing time of V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the amount of data in the middle of the operation to be stored will be extremely large. The content of the address data when returning to a state in the middle of processing in a complicated processing time may be complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting new activation of the V interrupt process before various arithmetic processes are started, a new processing time of the V interrupt process is not started in the middle of various arithmetic processes. It becomes possible.

  When the task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72 and the task processing is resumed from the interrupted state in the next V interrupt processing, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound side MPU 62. In the sound light side MPU 62, the pointer information of the control pattern table is adjusted corresponding to the delay. Thereby, even if it is a case where the said delay generate | occur | produces, it becomes possible to synchronize the content of the execution control of the production in the sound light side MPU 62, and the content of the execution control of the production in the display CPU72.

  If the task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72, a negative determination is made in step S606 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15), so that the pointer information in the execution target table is not updated and the sound side MPU 62 is returned. In the configuration in which the delayed command is transmitted, if the delay non-occurrence condition is satisfied even if the task processing is interrupted, the determination processing in step S606 is not executed, and the pointer of the execution target table Information is updated and no delay command is sent. Specifically, when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly read in the work RAM 73, the determination process of step S606 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S605. Instead, the process of step S607 is executed. Thereby, although there is a possibility that the image display for production cannot be performed smoothly, it is possible to give the highest priority to the start of the image display corresponding to the fraud notification or the state notification. That is, even if a notification execution target table is newly read into the work RAM 73 in the command corresponding process, a notification image is displayed as long as the pointer update process in step S607 is not performed on the execution target table thereafter. Does not start. On the other hand, when the notification execution target table is newly read, even if the task processing is interrupted last time, the notification update target table is executed by executing the pointer update processing in step S607. It is possible to prevent the start of image display from being delayed.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  In the VDP 76, processing for setting the value of the register 92 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 72, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 41 based on the drawing data produced in the frame area | regions 82a and 82b is performed.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 22A to 22C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on a target buffer, which is information indicating whether drawing data corresponding to an image for one frame related to the drawing list is to be drawn in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, is set. Has been. Also, in the header information, information on the presence / absence of decoding designation and the address of moving image data to be decoded is set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set. Further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and information of image data to be used is set corresponding to each numerical information one-to-one. Also, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that an individual image desired to be displayed is positioned on the back side of the display surface P in an image for one frame before the drawing target. The individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data and one sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 22A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so that the front side is in the order of background image → effect image → design.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. Specifically, as for the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 22B, the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing the background data, and initial background data Scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame regions 82a and 82b for the size set as the state, and uniform α value information indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) when writing the background data And α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target are set. The types of parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not individually set for all the pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for specifying coordinate information. In the VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the designated coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the center pixel is on the designated coordinate. . Thereby, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to recognize coordinates for all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central pixel, and may be a corner pixel such as upper left or upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixel by using the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and sprite data need not be finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but should be controlled uniformly for all pixels. By being able to cope with a uniform α value, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, the transparency can be finely controlled in units of pixels.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list has been completed. If the creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S1102 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, the corresponding processing at the time of reception is executed in step S1103.

  In the handling process at the time of reception, it is grasped in which frame area 82a, 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list.

  In a succeeding step S1104, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as a reading target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process in step S1104, the current drawing target image data is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is being created, a drawing list counter update process is executed in step S1106. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the processing of step S1104 and step S1105 is executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process may be used. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be employed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, or after the processing in step S1105 is executed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the output of the image signal for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If not completed, the present drawing process is terminated. If completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S1108, and then the present drawing process is terminated.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame with respect to such a frame. Note that the display circuit 94 includes a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the switching by the selector circuit. The frame regions 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are restricted so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration for performing a color change effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a color change effect will be described.

  FIG. 24A to FIG. 24C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24 (a-1) to 24 (a-3), the color change effect is a moving image in which the color change effect character CH1 performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined period including a plurality of image update timings. When displayed, it is an effect in which the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 is changed according to the game situation. For example, when a color change effect is executed as an effect for a game turn, the player is informed of the expected level of reach display occurrence and the expected level of jackpot result depending on the display color of the color change target region CR. Further, when the color change effect is applied in the slot machine instead of the pachinko machine 10, the color change target region CR may be displayed in a display color corresponding to the type of the winning combination in the internal lottery.

  The color change effect character CH1 is displayed so that a player can recognize that a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet is expressed. The color change target area CR is set at a plurality of locations in the color change effect character CH1. Specifically, the color change target region CR is set in the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the trunk portion of the color change effect character CH1. The display colors of the color change target areas CR at a plurality of locations are set to the same color. For example, when the display color of the color change target region CR is set to blue, the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in blue, and the display color of the color change target region CR is displayed. Is set to red, the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the trunk portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in red. In the final stage of the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24A-3, the color change effect image EG1 is displayed for the color change effect character CH1. An effect image is an image that represents a blast, an image that represents water splash, a light-emitting image that represents light being emitted from a light source, and an aura image that represents as if the surroundings of a character are emitting light. In addition, this is an image for enhancing the visual effect. As the color change effect effect image EG1, an image is displayed in which light is emitted from the color change effect character CH1.

  When performing the color change effect, the base still image data BD1, BD2, BD3 shown in FIGS. 24B-1 to 24B-3, and FIGS. 24C-1 to 24C- Part image data PD1, PD2, and PD3 shown in 3) are used. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1. The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are image data for overwriting the color change target region CR in the color change effect character CH1 based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, and to add the color change effect effect image EG1. Image data. After the base still image data BD1 to BD3 shown in FIGS. 24 (b-1) to 24 (b-3) are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, FIGS. By drawing the part image data PD1 to PD3 shown in c-3), as shown in FIGS. 24 (a-1) to 24 (a-3), the color change effect is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The character CH1 is displayed and the display color of the color change target area CR is changed according to the situation.

  Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. First, the data structure for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 74 for executing the color change effect. As shown in FIG. 25A, the memory module 74 includes base moving image data BMD for enabling derivation of base still image data BD1 to BD3, first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3, A color palette data group CP is stored in advance.

  The base moving image data BMD is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data for one frame and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the base moving image data BMD is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames. More specifically, in the base moving image data BMD, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have. The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. . B picture data is decoded by bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or plural frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or plural frames. This is data that can create still image data for one frame. In the compressed data of the base moving image data BMD, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., The (n−1) th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the nth frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The number of base still image data BD1 to BD3 created by developing the base moving image data BMD is for all frames included in the execution period of the color change effect. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying only the color change effect character CH1 as shown in FIGS. 24 (b-1) to 24 (b-3). By using all the base still image data BD1 to BD3, it is possible to display a moving image in which the color change effect character CH1 is operating according to a predetermined motion path. Further, for each pixel of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, color information for one byte is set for each of RGB, and an opaque α value is set.

  The first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in the same number as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 so as to correspond one-to-one with the base still image data BD1 to BD3. As shown in FIGS. 24 (c-1) to 24 (c-3), the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are in the color change effect character CH1 based on the corresponding base still image data BD1 to BD3. The color change target region CR having the same position, shape, and size as the color change target region CR is set to be displayed. In this case, the part image data PD1 to PD3 are set so that the plurality of color change target areas CR are displayed at positions separated from each other, but the plurality of color change target areas CR are collected together. Data of a frame region FR that fills between a plurality of color change target regions CR is set so that it can be handled as one image data. Color information is not set for each pixel in the frame region FR, and a completely transparent α value is set. On the other hand, although 1-byte color information is set for each pixel in the color change target region CR, the α value is not set. Therefore, when the part image data PD1 to PD3 is overwritten on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, the image by the part image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed for the color change target region CR. For, images based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are displayed as they are.

  As shown in FIG. 24C, the part image data for a plurality of frames from the frame at the end timing of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing among the part image data PD1 to PD3. Data for displaying not only the color change target region CR but also the color change effect effect image EG1 is set. For each pixel for displaying the color change effect image EG1, color information for 1 byte is set, and an α value that is a translucent value is set. When such part image data is overwritten on the base still image data, not only the color change target area CR is overwritten in the color change effect character CH1, but also the color change effect as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3). A color change effect image EG1 that is translucent is displayed around the character CH1. The state in which the color change effect image EG1 is displayed in this manner is continued over a plurality of frames up to the frame at the end timing.

  The color palette data group CP includes a plurality of color palettes CP1 and CP2 for designating display colors to be applied to the color information of the color change target region CR in each of the part image data PD1 to PD3. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are table data in which color information is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with all the data that can be set for each pixel of the part image data PD1 to PD3. , CP2 is referred to, and color information corresponding to the data set for each pixel is derived.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (b-1) and 25 (b-2), the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are set with data such that different colors are based on each other. For example, in the case of the color palette CP1 in FIG. 25 (b-1), red is the base tone, and in the case of the color palette CP2 in FIG. 25 (b-2), green is the base tone. Therefore, when the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25B-1 is applied, the color change target region CR based on the part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on red, and the color palette CP1 of FIG. Is applied, the color change target region CR based on the part image data PD1 to PD3 is green. Since the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are data in which only the relationship between the color information and the display color is determined, the data capacity of one color palette CP1 and CP2 is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, the total data capacity of all the color palettes CP1 and CP2 included in the color palette data group CP is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, in a configuration in which three or more display colors of the color change target region CR are set, the sum of all the data capacities of the part image data PD1 to PD3 and all the data capacities of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 is the base. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity obtained by doubling the data capacity of the video data BMD. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing image data in advance, compared to a configuration in which base moving image data BMD is prepared for the types of display colors in the color change target region CR.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for color change effects executed by the display CPU 72. The color change effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). Further, the calculation process for the color change effect is activated when information on the color change effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  When it is the start timing of the color change effect (step S1201: YES), the addresses of the base moving image data BMD and the first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 in the memory module 74 are grasped (steps S1202 and step). S1203). In addition, the address in the memory module 74 of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display color set in the execution target table is grasped (step S1204). Thereafter, in step S1205, color change effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1201, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, various addresses corresponding to the current frame number set in the current pointer information in the execution target table are grasped (step S1206). Specifically, when the base moving image data BMD is decoded and the base still image data BD1 to BD3 for a plurality of frames are expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the base still image data corresponding to the current frame number The address of the area where BD1 to BD3 are stored, the address of the area where the part image data PD1 to PD3 corresponding to the current frame number are stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 The address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1207, various parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be used this time is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is obtained in the work RAM 73 by the base still image data. Information for control is updated by writing in areas secured in correspondence with BD1 to BD3 and part image data PD1 to PD3. Thereafter, in step S1208, color change effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When the calculation process for the color change effect is executed as described above, the base still image data BD1 corresponding to the current frame number is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). ~ BD3 and part image data PD1 to PD3 are set as drawing objects, and color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are set as use objects. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is set, and color change effect designation information is set. If it is the start timing of the color change effect, color change effect start designation information is set.

  Next, the setting process for color change effect and the write process for color change effect executed in the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the color change effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for the color change effect is a drawing process (FIG. 23). This process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1105. Further, when color change effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the color change effect setting process and the color change effect writing process are executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the color change effect designation information is set in association with the image data for effect, the setting process for color change effect and the write process for color change effect are included in the current drawing list. It is activated when the drawing order of the image data for production is reached.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing setting processing for color change effects.

  When the color change effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1301: YES), the base moving image data BMD is stored in the memory module 74 from the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the base moving image data BMD is read from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1302). Then, decoding processing of the base moving image data BMD is performed using the moving image decoder 93 (step S1303). As a result, all the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are developed and stored in the base moving image area provided in the development buffer 81.

  Thereafter, in step S1304, from the address information set in the drawing list, the address of the area where the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are stored in the memory module 74 is grasped, and the grasping result is obtained. Based on this, all of the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are read from the memory module 74 to the part image area provided in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In step S1305, the address of the area in which the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped from the address information set in the drawing list, and the memory module is based on the grasped result. The color palettes CP 1 and CP 2 are read out from 74 to the palette area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process of step S1305 is executed, in step S1306, information on the address where the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In step S1307, the information of the address where the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In step S1308, the parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is grasped from the information set in the drawing list.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a writing process for color change effects.

  First, the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be drawn this time are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b (step S1401).

  Thereafter, in step S1402 to step S1406, the base image data BD1 for the current drawing target part image data PD1 to PD3 in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b according to the color palettes PD1 and PD2 corresponding to the current display color. ... BD3 is overwritten on each drawn dot.

  Specifically, first, in step S1402, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the current part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn is set in a write processing counter provided in the register 92. Thereafter, in step S1403, the color information corresponding to the data set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time corresponds to the current display color. Read from the color palettes PD1 and PD2. In step S1404, the color information read in step S1403 is overwritten on the dot corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  Incidentally, when the current pixel corresponds to the frame region FR other than the color change target region CR or the color change effect image EG1, no matter what color palette PD1, PD2, the color information is colorless. Is selected and overwritten so that the color information is completely transparent. In this case, the color information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 written in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b is maintained without being changed. If the current pixel corresponds to the color change target region CR, the color information based on the current display color is overwritten as opaque. If the current pixel corresponds to the color change effect image EG1, the color information corresponding to the effect image EG1 is overwritten as translucent.

  Thereafter, the value of the write processing counter in the register 92 is decremented by 1 in step S1405, and it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is “0”. When it is not “0”, the pixel writing process corresponding to the value of the writing process counter after the subtraction is executed, and when it is “0”, the writing process for the color change effect is finished as it is. .

  In addition to the base moving image data BMD, part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided as image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1, and base still image data obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. By overwriting the part image data PD1 to PD3 on the BD1 to BD3 and changing the type of the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3, the color can be obtained while using the same base moving image data BMD. It becomes possible to change the display color of the color change target region CR of the change effect character CH1. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing image data in advance, compared to a configuration in which base moving image data BMD is prepared for the types of display colors in the color change target region CR.

  The part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. Thereby, the display color of the color change target region CR of the color change effect character CH1 can be set to a predetermined color over the entire image display period based on the base moving image data BMD.

  The display color of the color change target region CR is changed by changing the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required to store the image data, compared to a configuration in which combinations of part image data PD1 to PD3 are prepared in advance for the number of display colors that can be changed.

  In the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD, although the color information is set, the α value that is completely transparent or translucent is not set. When still image data in which an α value that is completely transparent or translucent is set is compressed as moving image data, the α value may adversely affect the difference data and the image quality may deteriorate, but the base still image data BD1 to BD3 Since the α value that is completely transparent or translucent is not set, it is possible to compress the image data without causing such image quality deterioration. Similarly, the part image data PD1 to PD3 in which the completely transparent or translucent α value is set together with the color information are not compressed as moving image data but are prepared as still image data. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image quality deterioration of the part image data PD1 to PD3.

  Data for displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set in the part image data PD3 for a plurality of frames from a frame at an intermediate timing on the end side of the color change effect to a frame at the end timing. Since the data of the color change effect image EG1 is data in which not only color information but also a semi-transparent α value is set, if such data is compressed as the base moving image data BMD, the α value adversely affects the difference data. There is a risk that the image quality will deteriorate. On the other hand, since the color change effect image EG1 is set for the part image data PD3 that is still image data, the image quality when the color change effect image EG1 is displayed is good. It becomes possible.

<Another configuration of the color change effect>
-The content of the image added by overlapping other image data with multiple still image data created by decoding the video data is a partial area of the character displayed by the video data However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which a character different from the character displayed by the moving image data is added. In this case, the moving image display is performed such that the character performs a predetermined motion in the moving image data, and the moving image display is performed so that the other character performs the predetermined motion by the image data added to the still image data based on the moving image data. It is good also as a structure performed.

  An image corresponding to the other image data is displayed for the image displayed by the moving image data by setting the other image data to be superimposed on the plurality of still image data created by decoding the moving image data. In the configuration to be added, instead of the configuration in which the content of the added image is changed by providing a plurality of other image data, the same is applied to a plurality of still image data created by moving image data. A configuration may be adopted in which the same still image is added to the moving image display created from the moving image data by setting the image data in an overlapping manner.

  The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are not limited to be stored as still image data as they are, and the part image data PD1 to PD3 may be compressed and provided as moving image data. In this case, when performing a color change effect, still image data created by decoding both the base video data BMD and the video data corresponding to the part image data PD1 to PD3 and decoding the base video data BMD. On the other hand, it is necessary to set the still image data created by decoding the latter moving image data in an overlapping manner.

  The base video data BMD is not limited to the configuration in which the part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the still image data created by decoding the base video data BMD. The still image data created by doing so may be configured to be larger than the part image data PD1 to PD3. In this case, the same part image data PD1 to PD3 is applied to each still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at a plurality of predetermined update timings. For example, in a configuration in which the display position, shape, and size of the color change target region CR are changed only once for a plurality of update timings, the part image data PD1 to PD3 may be provided for the number of the change timings. . Thereby, the number of parts image data PD1-PD3 can be suppressed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with more part image data PD1-PD3 than the still image data produced by decoding base moving image data BMD. In this case, different part image data PD1 to PD3 can be set for the same still image data created from the base moving image data BMD, and the color change target area in a state where the color change effect character CH1 is stationary. The CR can be moved or deformed.

  -It is limited to a configuration in which only one part image data PD1 to PD3 is applied to still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at each update timing in a period in which moving image display by the base moving image data BMD is performed. The configuration may be such that two or more parts image data are applied at one update timing.

<Configuration for effect production>
Next, a configuration for effect production will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A to FIG. 29E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect effect.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the effect effect is that the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect effect character CH2 from the front of the display surface P in a situation where the effect effect character CH2 is being displayed as a moving image. It is an effect that is displayed. Specifically, an image representing smoke is displayed as the effect image EG2.

  Character image data SD is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect effect character CH2. A plurality of character still image data SD is provided so that the effect effect character CH2 can perform a predetermined operation during the effect effect execution period. As shown in FIG. 29B, the character still image data SD treats data for displaying the effect effect character CH2 as an individual image and an image based on the character still image data SD as a rectangular image. In order to enable the above, data of a frame region FR1 set so as to surround the effect presentation character CH2 is provided.

  Effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect image EG2. A plurality of effect image data ED1 are provided so that the effect image EG2 can change in a predetermined manner during the execution period of the effect production. As shown in FIG. 29C, the effect image data ED1 makes it possible to handle data for displaying the effect image EG2 as an individual image and an image based on the effect image data ED1 as a rectangular image. Therefore, the data of the frame region FR2 set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG2.

  The character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are formed to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. Further, the pixels constituting the effect effect character CH2 and the effect image EG2 are set as objects to be displayed on the display surface P because they are set to an opaque or translucent α value, but constitute the frame regions FR1 and FR2. Since a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel, the pixel is not displayed on the display surface P.

  As already described, the frame regions 82a and 82b in which the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area stores color information. The area is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), in each unit area 121, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of 1 byte are set in a one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. 256 colors can be set for each of RGB.

  The smaller the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. Further, the larger the value of the numerical information, the brighter the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In a configuration that can display only 256 colors instead of the full color system, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), color information including numerical information is set for each pixel 122 of the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1, as shown in FIG. Each pixel 122 is provided with 1-byte color information defining areas 122a to 122c corresponding to each RGB color on a one-to-one basis, and 256 colors can be displayed for each RGB.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set with 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, each pixel 122 has The color information prescribing areas 122a to 122c may also be set to 1 byte.

  In each pixel 122, an α value defining area 122d is set in addition to the color information defining areas 122a to 122c, and α value information is set. A storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value defining area 122d, but in actuality, any numerical information of “0 to 100” is set in decimal. The information on the α value is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, the numerical information obtained by accumulating the α value for the RGB numerical information in each pixel 122 is used for storing color information in the unit area 121. It is stored for each of the areas 121a to 121c corresponding to RGB. In this case, when an opaque α value (specifically “1”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is in the corresponding unit area 121, and a completely transparent α value ( Specifically, when “0”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is not written in the corresponding unit area 121.

When 0 <α value <1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed with the image superimposed on the back side of the display surface P, and the calculation result is applied to the unit area 121. Written. In the case where a pixel satisfying 0 <α value <1 in the character still image data SD is written in the unit area 121, a blending process is executed with an image superimposed on the back side of the display surface P. In detail, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is “r1, g1, b1”, the color information to be written next in the unit area 121 is “r2, g2, b2”, When α value set in association with color information is α1,
R: r1 × (1−α1) + r2 × α1
G: g1 × (1−α1) + g2 × α1
B: b1 × (1−α1) + b2 × α1
It becomes.

On the other hand, in the case of the effect image data ED1, 0 <α value <1 is set as a semi-transparent α value for all the pixels for displaying the effect image EG2. When the pixels are drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b, pixel addition processing for displaying the effect image EG2 is executed for each unit area 121 in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. . In detail, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is “r3, g3, b3”, and the color information of the effect image EG2 written in the unit area 121 is “r4, g4, b4”. When the α value set in association with the color information is α2,
R: r3 + r4 × α2
G: g3 + g4 × α2
B: b3 + b4 × α2
It becomes.

  By performing the addition process, the effect image EG2 corresponding to the effect image data ED1 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the effect effect character CH2 on which the effect image EG2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image EG2 is an image that allows the back side to pass through, such as smoke, and thus, when displayed independently of the effect effect character CH2, a sense of incongruity occurs. On the other hand, by performing the addition process as described above, the effect image EG2 is displayed in a state in which the effect effect character CH2 is reflected, and without causing the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling, This is preferable.

  In this way, when the effect image EG2 is applied, an addition process is executed. However, when the bright effect image EG2 is similarly superimposed on a bright image, the color in the unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b. The information storage areas 121a to 121c have the maximum values, which may deviate from the designer's intention and display white (so-called whiteout). On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect effect is executed while suppressing the occurrence of the overexposure.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing effect production while suppressing occurrence of overexposure will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for effect production executed by the display CPU 72. The effect effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The calculation process for effect production is activated when information on the effect production is set in the currently set execution target table.

  First, in step S1501, the character data to be displayed is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The character data includes character still image data SD, and the type of character still image data SD corresponding to the current frame update timing is recognized as a display target. By the way, when effect production is executed, a video is displayed as if the effect production character CH2 is performing a predetermined operation over a plurality of frames in a situation where the effect image EG2 is not displayed, and then a video is displayed. A display in which the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect effect character CH2 is performed over a plurality of frames. In subsequent step S1502, the parameter information of the character still image data SD grasped in step S1501 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the character still image data SD. Control information is updated by writing to the area.

  In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the effect image data ED1 should be applied based on the currently set execution target table. If it is necessary to apply the effect image data ED1, in step S1504, the effect image data ED1 of the type corresponding to the current frame update timing is grasped as a display target. In the subsequent step S1505, the parameter information of the effect image data ED1 grasped in step S1504 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect image data ED1. The information for control is updated by writing. Thereafter, in step S1506, effect generation designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect image data ED1 should be used is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  In the subsequent step S1507, whether or not it is the execution timing of the partial addition process, which is a process for suppressing the occurrence of overexposure when the effect image data ED1 is applied, is determined based on the currently set execution target table. judge. If it is the execution timing of the partial addition process, in step S1508, partial addition designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the partial addition process should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, effect effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect effect is to be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When the calculation process for effect rendering is executed as described above, the character still image corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). The data SD is set as a drawing target, and when the effect image EG2 is displayed, the effect image data ED1 is set as a drawing target. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 is set. In addition, effect rendering designation information is set in the drawing list, effect generation designation information is set during the display period of the effect image EG2, and partial addition designation information is set at the execution timing of the partial addition processing. Is set. At the start timing of the effect presentation, the address information where the character still image data SD is stored in the memory module 74 and the address information where the effect image data ED1 is stored are designated in the drawing list. Is done.

  Next, an effect effect setting process and an effect effect writing process executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The effect effect setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the effect effect writing process is a step of the drawing process (FIG. 23). This process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in S1105. Further, when effect effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the effect effect setting process and the effect effect writing process are executed. Here, in the drawing list, the effect production designation information is set in association with the image data for production. Therefore, the setting processing for effect production and the writing processing for effect production are for the production of the current drawing list. This is activated when the image data drawing order is reached.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a setting process for effect production.

  In step S1601, the address of the area where the still image data SD for character to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is read in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. At the start timing of the effect presentation, the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 used in the effect presentation are read from the memory module 74 and written in a predetermined area of the development buffer 81. In subsequent step S1602, parameter information applied to the character still image data SD to be drawn this time is grasped.

  When the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1603: YES), the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list is displayed in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S1604. To grasp the address of the area being read out. Thereafter, in step S1605, parameter information applied to the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is grasped.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a writing process for effect production.

  First, the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b (step S1701).

  When effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1702: YES), processing for applying the effect image data ED1 is executed in steps S1703 to S1712. Specifically, first, in step S1703, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is set in a write processing counter provided in the register 92. Thereafter, in step S1704, it is determined whether partial addition designation information is set in the drawing list. If the partial addition designation information is set, after performing the setting process for partial addition shown in steps S1705 to S1708, the addition process shown in steps S1709 to S1711 is executed. If the partial addition designation information is not set, the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for partial addition.

  A case where the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for partial addition will be described. First, the RGB color information set to the pixel corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the write processing counter (step S1711). As a result, the integration result of the color information set to the corresponding pixel of the effect image data ED1 and the α value is added as it is to the color information set to the pixel of the character still image data SD. .

  The case where the addition process is executed after the partial addition setting process is executed will be described. In the setting process for partial addition, first, RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the writing process counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is read (step S1705). Then, the read color information is inverted (step S1706). At the time of this inversion, the read out color information is subtracted from “255” which is the maximum value of the color information for each of RGB. Further, a value obtained by subtracting the read color information from “255” is divided by “255” which is the maximum value of color information (step S1707). After that, the value of the division result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the writing process counter in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b (step S1708).

  In this case, for the pixels for which “0” is set as the color information in the effect image data ED1, the division result is “1”. Therefore, the division results are integrated in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Dot color information does not change. On the other hand, for the pixels for which a value of 1 or more is set as color information in the effect image data ED1, the division result is a value less than 1. In the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the color information of the dot obtained by integrating the division results of the values less than 1 becomes a value smaller than the initially set value.

  Thereafter, each color information of RGB set in the pixel corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current value of the writing processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). Thereafter, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1 in step S1711, and it is determined in step S1712 whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the pixel writing process corresponding to the value of the writing process counter after the subtraction is executed, and if it is “0”, the writing process for the effect rendering is ended as it is. .

  By executing the setting process for partial addition as described above, the color information of the character still image data SD already drawn in the unit areas 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b is reduced to a small value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the value of the color information of the unit area 121 to which the effect image data ED1 is added in a state before the addition process is performed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

  This reduction is performed by integrating values obtained by inverting each color information of the effect image data ED1 by the maximum value of the color information. Therefore, in each unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b, The unit area 121 having a larger color information of the applied effect image data ED1 is greatly reduced in color information (that is, a smaller value is integrated). As a result, the unit area 121 to which pixels of large color information are applied in the effect image data ED1 has a larger amount of reduction in color information in advance, and priority is given to the color information of the unit area 121 where the possibility of overexposure is high. Therefore, it can be reduced in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the reduction amount of the color information set by the character still image data SD for the unit area 121 where the possibility of overexposure is low, and the display content of the effect effect character CH2 is maintained as much as possible. It becomes possible.

  The reduction of the color information corresponding to the content of the color information of the effect image data ED1 is performed using the effect image data ED1. As a result, data necessary for storing image data in the memory module 74 is different from a configuration in which image data for partial addition different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The capacity can be suppressed.

<Another form of configuration related to effect production>
Instead of the configuration in which the color information is reduced using the effect image data ED1, the reduction data different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance, and the reduction data is stored in the memory module 74. It is good also as a structure which reduces color information by applying to the still image data SD for characters. In this case, the reduction data is reduced in a portion where data corresponding to relatively bright color information in the effect image data ED1 is applied, compared to a portion where data corresponding to relatively dark color information is applied. Is set to be large, the color information can be reduced in a manner corresponding to the data content of the effect image data ED1 as in the above embodiment.

  In the color information set by the character still image data SD, the color information is reduced for portions where color information of a predetermined value or more in the effect image data ED1 is set, while the character still image data SD In the color information set by the above, it may be configured such that the color information is not reduced for portions where color information equal to or greater than a predetermined numerical value is not set in the effect image data ED1.

  In the character still image data SD, the color information of the pixel where the color information of the pixels for which the completely transparent α value (specifically “0”) in the effect image data ED1 is set is set. It is good also as a structure by which reduction of this is not performed. In this case, even if the addition processing of the effect image data ED1 is performed, it is possible to exclude the portion where the overexposure does not occur reliably from the color information reduction target, and display the image with the content to be originally displayed. Is possible.

  The target for reducing the color information corresponding to the color information of each pixel set in the effect image data ED1 is not limited to the color information set by the character still image data SD. Both the color information set by the still image data SD and the color information set by the effect image data ED1 may be used, and the color information set by the character still image data SD is reduced. Alternatively, only the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced.

  The color information set by the character still image data SD may be reduced in correspondence with the color information set by the character still image data SD, and the color set by the character still image data SD may be used. The color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced in correspondence with the information.

<Structure for development development>
Next, a configuration for performing the development effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A to FIG. 33E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the development effect.

  Development effect means that the type of effect image applied changes as the effect progresses, and the type of effect image increases so that the overall effect image content becomes flashy in stages Production. Specifically, in the first stage production period of the development effect, the first effect image EG3 irradiated with light rays from the center toward the outside is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33B, the second effect image EG4 in which the particles move from the center toward the outside is displayed as a moving image in the two-stage production period, and in the third stage production period in the development production, As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are both displayed in a superimposed state, as shown in FIG. 33 (d) during the fourth stage of the development effect. In addition to the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4, a third effect image EG5 in which a ring of light spreads outward from the center side is a moving image. It is shown.

  The development effect is executed as an effect for game times, and the degree of expectation of occurrence of a reach display or the expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result becomes higher as it progresses to the later stage. That is, when it is completed only in the first stage, when it is executed after the first stage until the second stage, it is completed, when it is executed after the first stage to the second stage until the third stage, and the first stage is completed. Each of the cases where the execution is executed up to the fourth stage after the stage 3 to the third stage is set as the execution pattern of the development effect, and the expectation is based on the case where the development effect of the rear execution pattern is executed. Becomes higher.

  In the development effect, the display contents of the effect images EG3 to EG5 are changed in a plurality of stages as described above, but the effect stored in advance in the memory module 74 in order to display the effect images EG3 to EG5 in the development effect. The number of image data ED2 to ED4 is smaller than the number of stages of development effects. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the memory module 74 combines the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 as image data for executing the development effect. Effect image data ED4 is stored in advance.

  The first effect image data ED2 is image data for displaying only the first effect image EG3 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3 is determined in a first stage effect period. A plurality are provided so that it can be changed in this manner. The first effect image data ED2 includes data for displaying the first effect image EG3 as an individual image and the first effect image data ED2 in order to be able to handle the image by the first effect image data ED2 as a rectangular image. Frame area data set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG3. Since the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3 are set to a semi-transparent α value (0 <α value <1), they are displayed on the display surface P. However, the pixels constituting the frame region are completely displayed. Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  The second effect image data ED3 is image data for displaying only the second effect image EG4 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the second effect image EG4 is predetermined in the second stage effect period. A plurality are provided so that it can be changed in this manner. The second effect image data ED3 includes data for displaying the second effect image EG4 as an individual image and a second effect image data ED3 in order to be able to handle the image by the second effect image data ED3 as a rectangular image. Frame area data set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG4. Since the translucent α value (0 <α value <1) is set for the pixels constituting the second effect image EG4, it is a display target on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame region are completely Since the transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  The composite effect image data ED4 is image data for displaying all the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image are displayed in the fourth effect period. A plurality of effect images EG5 are provided so as to be able to change in a predetermined manner. The composite effect image data ED4 includes data for displaying the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 as individual images, and an image based on the composite effect image data ED4 as a rectangular image. In order to make it possible to handle the data, a frame area data set so as to surround the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 is provided. Since the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are set with a translucent α value (0 <α value <1), the pixels to be displayed on the display surface P However, since a completely transparent α value is set for the pixels constituting the frame region, the pixels are not displayed on the display surface P.

  Here, only the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the composite effect image data ED4 are stored in advance as image data for displaying the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect. In this case, the effect image data corresponding to the third stage production period does not exist. On the other hand, both the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 are used in the third stage effect period, so that the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are displayed. The video is displayed with both superimposed.

  The manner in which the development effect is executed using each of the effect image data ED2 to ED4 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 34 (a) shows the usage period of the first effect image data ED2, FIG. 34 (b) shows the usage period of the second effect image data ED3, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the composite effect image data ED4. Indicates the period of use.

  In the first stage effect period executed from the timing t1 to the second timing, the first effect image data ED2 is used as shown in FIG. 34A, and the second effect image data ED3 and The composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the second stage production period executed from the timing t2 to the third timing, the second effect image data ED3 is used as shown in FIG. 34B, and the first effect image data ED2 and The composite effect image data ED4 is not used.

  In the third stage effect period executed from the timing t3 to the fourth timing, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image are displayed. Both of the data ED3 are used, and the composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the fourth stage effect period executed from the timing t4 to the fifth timing, the composite effect image data ED4 is used as shown in FIG. 34C, and the first effect image data ED2 and the first effect image data ED2 are used. The 2-effect image data ED3 is not used.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the development effect will be described below. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for development effects executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the development effect is executed in the calculation process for the effect in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The calculation process for the development effect is activated when information about the development effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the start timing of the development effect (step S1801: YES), the addresses of the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the composite effect image data ED4 in the memory module 74 are grasped (step S1801: YES). Step S1802). In step S1803, development effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the development effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the first stage production period (step S1804: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1805). . Further, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the first effect image data ED2. Is updated (step S1806). Thereafter, in step S1807, first stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the stage is the first stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the second stage production period (step S1808: YES), the second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1809). . Further, the parameter information of the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the second effect image data ED3. Is updated (step S1810). Thereafter, in step S <b> 1811, second stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the second stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the third stage effect period (step S1812: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1813). The second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S1814). Also, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is obtained in the work RAM 73 by the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with the data ED3 (step S1815). Thereafter, in step S1816, the third stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the third stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is not the third stage production period (step S1812: NO), this means that it is the fourth stage production period, and the process proceeds to step S1817. In step S1817, the type of composite effect image data ED4 corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Further, the parameter information of the composite effect image data ED4 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the composite effect image data ED4. Is updated (step S1818). Thereafter, in step S1819, the fourth stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the fourth stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When the calculation process for the development effect is executed as described above, the effect image data corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). ED2 to ED4 are set as drawing targets. Also, parameter information to be applied to the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn is set in the drawing list. In addition, any one of the first stage designation information, the second stage designation information, the third stage designation information, and the fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the current production period, and the development production starts. Development timing start designation information is set at the timing.

  Next, the setting process for the development effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the development effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any of the first to fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the development effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the first to fourth effect designation information is set in association with the image data for effect, the setting process for development effect is the image data for effect in the current draw list. It is activated when the drawing order is reached.

  When the development effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1901: YES), each memory image 74 stores the first effect image data ED2 from the address information set in the drawing list. And the address where each second effect image data ED3 is stored, and the address where each combined effect image data ED4 is stored, and the effect image is obtained from the memory module 74 based on the grasped result. All of the data ED2 to ED4 are read out to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1902).

  If the first stage designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1903: YES), the current first effect image data ED2 indicated in the drawing list is used for developing the VRAM 75 in step S1904. The address of the area being read out in the buffer 81 is grasped. In subsequent step S1905, parameter information to be applied to the current first effect image data ED2 is grasped.

  If the second stage designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1906: YES), the current second effect image data ED3 indicated in the drawing list is used for developing the VRAM 75 in step S1907. The address of the area being read out in the buffer 81 is grasped. In subsequent step S1908, parameter information applied to the current second effect image data ED3 is grasped.

  When the third stage designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1909: YES), the current first effect image data ED2 indicated in the drawing list is used for developing the VRAM 75 in step S1910. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped, and the current second effect image data ED3 shown in the drawing list is read in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S1911. Know the address of the area. In subsequent step S1912, parameter information to be applied to the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is grasped.

  If the first to third stage designation information is not set in the current drawing list (step S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913 because it means that the stage is in the fourth stage. In step S 1913, the address of the area where the current composite effect image data ED 4 shown in the drawing list is read in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. In the subsequent step S1914, parameter information to be applied to the current composite effect image data ED4 is grasped.

  By executing the setting process for the development effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S1105), the rendering target effect image data ED2 to ED4 provide the parameter information for the rendering target frame areas 82a and 82b. Rendered in the applied state.

  In the third stage effect period in which the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are displayed in a superimposed state, the combined effect image data in which both effect images EG3 and EG4 are set together is displayed. Rather than preparing in advance, the first effect image data ED2 to be rendered in the first stage production period and the second effect image data ED3 to be rendered in the second stage production period are used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing effect image data in advance. On the other hand, for the fourth stage effect period in which the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are simultaneously displayed, the combined effect in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are set together. Image data ED4 is prepared in advance. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are simultaneously displayed using the three types of effect image data. That is, according to the above configuration, it is possible to produce an effect of increasing the number of types of effect images EG3 to EG5 step by step while balancing the storage capacity of the memory module 74 and the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to development effects>
A configuration may be adopted in which effect image data for displaying the third effect image EG5 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, each of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be individually displayed in different display periods, and one composite effect image data ED4 is used. The first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be displayed simultaneously. Further, in this configuration, it is possible to display any two combinations of images among the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5.

<Configuration for simultaneous display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a simultaneous display effect will be described.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37 (a), the simultaneous display effect is a timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time increases and the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 increases. In this effect, the display of the increase effect image EG6 is started. The increase effect image EG6 is an image in which waves propagate from the center toward the outside. The increase effect image EG6 is displayed so as to change in a predetermined manner during a predetermined period from the timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 increases simultaneously to the update timing of a plurality of frames.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37B, the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. ing. Although both the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, the simple effect image data ED6 is more than the normal effect image data ED5. The difference is that the number of pixels is small. Further, since the normal effect image data ED5 has the same number of pixels as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, the simple effect image data ED6 displays the effect characters CH3 to CH7. It can be said that the number of pixels is smaller than that of the image data.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (c-1) and 37 (c-2), the simple effect image data ED6 has half the number of pixels as the normal effect image data ED5. Yes. Therefore, in order to display the increase effect image EG6 with the same size, when the simple effect image data ED6 is set as the drawing target, the scale is compared with the case where the normal effect image data ED5 is set as the drawing target. It is necessary to double the information.

  Whereas only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, the normal effect image data ED5 changes the increase effect image EG6 in a predetermined manner over a predetermined period over a plurality of frame update timings. A plurality are provided so that it is possible. When displaying the increase effect image EG6, as will be described in detail later, the simple effect image data ED6 is used first, followed by a plurality of normal effect image data ED5. In this case, the increase effect image displayed by the simple effect image data ED6 so that the increase effect image EG6 can be changed in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over a plurality of frame update timings. In contrast to the display mode of EG6, the display mode of the increase effect image EG6 displayed by the normal effect image data ED5 that is used first among the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 has continuity. .

  The normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, and the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are rectangular images. In order to make it possible to handle the data, a frame area data set so as to surround the periphery of the increase effect image EG6 is provided. A translucent α value (0 <α value <1) is set for the pixels constituting the increase effect image EG6, and therefore, the pixel is a display target on the display surface P. Since a completely transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

  The manner in which the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are selectively used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38A shows a minority display period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time is small, and FIG. 38B shows a period where the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time is large. 38 (c) shows a period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, and FIG. 38 (d) shows an increase time. The period during which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the minority display period starts from the timing t1 to the timing t2. In the minority display period, there are only two effect characters CH3 and CH4 displayed on the display surface P as shown in FIG.

  When the minority display period ends at the timing of t2, the majority display period starts as shown in FIG. At the timing when the multiple display period is started, the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed on the display surface P is increased to five as shown in FIG. 38B, and the increase effect image EG6 is displayed. Is started. In this case, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 as shown in FIG. 38C at the timing t2 which is the start timing of the multiple display period. . Accordingly, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 is read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data read-out period at the start timing of the multiple display period, increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multiple display period, and display the increase effect image EG6. Both the start and the start can be suitably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of a large number of display periods. There is no need to set up a program for advance transfer.

  The state where the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is continued over the update timings of a plurality of frames. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 38C and 38D, the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to improve the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 over the period during which the simple effect image data ED6 is used. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 38B and 38D, the multi-display period ends and the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the normal effect image data ED5 ends.

  Below, the concrete process structure for performing a simultaneous display effect is demonstrated. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for simultaneous display effects executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the simultaneous display effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The calculation process for the simultaneous display effect is activated when information on the simultaneous display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the minority display period (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2002 whether it is the start timing of the minority display period. When it is the start timing of the minority display period (step S2002: YES), each address in the memory module 74 of the image data for displaying the presentation characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period is grasped (step S2003). ). In step S2004, minority display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the minority display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2002 or when the process of step S2004 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2005). In addition, the parameter information of the image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2006). . Thereafter, in step S2007, the minority display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the minority display period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  If it is the multiple display period (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2008 whether it is the start timing of the multiple display period. When it is the start timing of the multiple display period (step S2008: YES), the memory module of the image data and the simple effect image data ED6 for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, and CH7 whose display is started in the multiple display period Each address in 74 is grasped (step S2009). In step S2010, multiple display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the multiple display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When the display period is the multiple display period and the simple display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: YES), based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is stored. Grasp (step S2012). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multi-display period and the simple effect image data ED6 are grasped. Further, the parameter information of these image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in correspondence with these image data in the work RAM 73, thereby updating the control information (step S2013). . Thereafter, in step S2014, the CPU 72 displays simple display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a simple display period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. Stored in the register.

  On the other hand, when it is not the simple display period, that is, when it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 (step S2011: NO), in step S2015. It is determined whether it is the start timing of the normal display period. When it is the start timing of the normal display period (step S2015: YES), the addresses in the memory module 74 for all the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 are grasped (step S2016). In step S2017, normal display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the normal display period should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

  When the display period is the multiple display period and the normal display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is obtained based on the currently set execution target table. Grasping (step S2018). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multi-display period and the normal effect image data ED5 are grasped. Further, the parameter information of these image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in correspondence with these image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2019). . Thereafter, in step S2020, the display CPU 72 displays normal display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is a normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. Stored in the register.

  When the calculation process for the simultaneous display effect is executed as described above, an effect character corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). Image data for displaying CH3 to CH7 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the case of a multi-display period, either the simple effect image data ED6 or the normal effect image data ED5 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this case, for the normal effect image data ED6, the normal effect image data ED6 of the type corresponding to the corresponding update timing is set as a drawing target. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to image data to be drawn is set. Also, in the drawing list, any one of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information is set in correspondence with the current performance period, and the minority display start designation information is set at the start timing of each display period. One of the multiple display start designation information and the normal display start designation information is set.

  Next, the setting process for simultaneous display effects executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for simultaneous display effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any one of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list, the simultaneous display effect setting process is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information are set in association with the image data for production, the setting process for simultaneous display production is performed in the current drawing list. Of these, it is activated when the rendering order of rendering image data is reached.

  If minority display designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2101: YES), it is determined in step S2102 whether or not minority display start designation information is further set in the drawing list. When the minority display start designation information is set (step S2102: YES), the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period in the memory module 74 from the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the image data for displaying is stored is grasped, and all of the image data is read from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result (step S2103).

  If the minority display designation information is set (step S2101: YES), the area where the current image data shown in the drawing list is read in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2104. Know your address. In subsequent step S2105, parameter information applied to the current image data is grasped.

  When a large number of display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2106: YES), display is started in the large number display period in the memory module 74 from the address information set in the drawing list. An address of an area where image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, and CH7 is stored is grasped, and all of the image data is read from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result. (Step S2107).

  Also, the address of the area where the simple effect image data ED6 is stored in the memory module 74 is grasped from the address information set in the current drawing list, and based on the grasped result, the memory effect for the simple effect is obtained. The image data ED6 is read out to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2108). In step S2109, enlargement processing of the read simple effect image data ED6 is executed. In the enlargement process, the number of pixels is increased while executing the color information interpolation process on the simple effect image data ED6, so that the number of pixels becomes the same as the number of pixels of the normal effect image data ED5. Effect image data is created and written into the expansion buffer 81.

  Here, the processing time required for the enlargement processing is the time required to read one normal effect image data ED5 from the memory module 74 and one simple effect image data ED6 from the memory module 74. The time is shorter than the time difference from the time required. As a result, even if the enlargement process is executed on the simple effect image data ED6, the processing time is shortened as compared with the case where the normal effect image data ED5 is read at the start timing of the multi-display period. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the normal display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2110: YES), the normal effect image data ED5 is stored in the memory module 74 from the address information set in the drawing list. Based on the grasped result, all the normal effect image data ED5 is read from the memory module 74 to the developing buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2111).

  If the simple display designation information or the normal display designation information is set in the current drawing list, the current image data indicated in the drawing list is read out in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2112. Know the address of the area. In this case, in the simple display period, the address of the area where the effect image data after the enlargement process is written is grasped in the expansion buffer 81. On the other hand, in the normal display period, the expansion buffer 81 grasps the address of the area where the normal effect image data ED5 corresponding to the current update timing is read. In subsequent step S2113, parameter information applied to the current image data is grasped.

  By performing the setting process for the simultaneous display effect, the rendering target characters CH3 to CH7 are displayed in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the subsequent writing process (step S1105). The image data is rendered with the parameter information applied. In addition, if the simplified display period, the effect image data after the enlargement process is drawn as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, while the parameter information is applied. Normal effect image data ED5 for displaying the effect image EG6 is drawn in a state where the parameter information is applied.

  At the start timing of the multiple display period, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. Accordingly, in the configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 is read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. Is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data read-out period at the start timing of the multiple display period, increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multiple display period, and display the increase effect image EG6. Both the start and the start can be suitably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of a large number of display periods. There is no need to set up a program for advance transfer.

  Image data in which the number of pixels is set to be small in order to shorten the time required to read out the image data is not the image data for displaying the production characters CH3 to CH7, but the effect image EG6 for increasing. Image data. Thus, it is possible to suitably display an image at the start timing of a large number of display periods while not reducing the image quality of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 that stand out as image display.

  At the stage where the multiple display period has progressed to some extent, the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. Thereby, the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 can be made favorable from the middle of the multi-display period.

  The simple effect image data ED6 is subjected to enlargement processing at the read timing, and the effect image data after the enlargement processing is used in the subsequent simple display period. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the enlargement process is executed every time during the simple display period.

<Another form of configuration related to simultaneous display effects>
A configuration may be adopted in which the simple effect image data ED6 is provided as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, but the normal effect image data ED5 is not provided. Even in this case, it is possible to display the increase effect image ED6 while reducing the time required to read the image data at the start timing of the multiple display period. In this configuration, the enlargement process is executed so that the simple effect image data ED6 has the same resolution as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7.

  The simple effect image data ED6 is set to a half resolution of the normal effect image data ED5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the simple effect image data ED6 is set to a resolution of 1/4. Alternatively, the resolution may be set to 1/3, or the resolution may be set to 2/3.

  A configuration in which there is a period during which the simplified effect image data ED6 is enlarged and used as in the above embodiment and a period during which the resolution stored in the memory module 74 is used may be employed. For example, when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the entire display surface P, the simplified effect image data ED6 is enlarged and used so as to partition a part of the display surface P. In the case where the increase effect image EG6 is displayed within the range within the divided area, the simple effect image data ED6 may be used at the same resolution.

  Instead of a configuration in which only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, a configuration in which a plurality of simple effect image data ED6 are provided may be employed. Accordingly, even when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the simple effect image data ED6, the display mode of the increase effect image EG6 can be changed. In this configuration, not all the simple effect image data ED6 are read out together at the timing of starting the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the simple effect image data ED6, but used at each update timing. It is preferable that the target simple effect image data ED6 is individually read out, and the enlargement process (step S2109) is performed on the read out simple effect image data ED6.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration relating to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 41, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56 and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball launching mechanism 58 as well as a function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50. The launch control device 57, a special figure unit 37 for displaying the result of the game times, and a general figure unit 38 for displaying the result of the public power open lottery are electrically connected. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 that drives and controls the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and further, a command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 is provided. A display control device 130 for controlling the symbol display device 41 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Is done.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Instruct the transfer. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, a display instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41. Do. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

  The memory module 133 is storage means that stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance and stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM).

  The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data to be pasted on the object data, and the rearmost surface of the image for one frame. Image data for the back side that constitutes the image.

  Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object data. When the texture data is pasted on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. The texture data may be held in any manner, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The manner of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygon) is used when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system.

  The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. The display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 135 to the memory module 133. The VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the development buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a. Since the VDP 135 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 135 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, and a display circuit 155. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 reads various image data stored in the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges object data designated as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system. The geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after the object data is arranged in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 performs light source adjustment and pasting of texture data on each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information to frame drawing data for one frame that is two-dimensional data. Created in the buffer 142. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame region 142a and a second frame region 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b are provided in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 142a or the second frame region 142b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described. The display CPU 131 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The contents of the command interrupt process are the same as those in the first embodiment. The contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S608.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing task processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the in-delay flag provided in the work RAM 132. When “1” is not set in the in-lag flag (step S2201: NO), a setting process for starting control is executed in step S2202. In the setting process for starting control, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control in the current processing time. In the present embodiment, an individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface or a 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data. is there.

  Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting the control, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If present, the work RAM 132 searches for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as a control start target on a one-to-one basis. Reserve a free buffer area. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  In subsequent step S2202, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  After that, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2204, and new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in step S2205 immediately after that, the background arithmetic process is executed (step S2206). In the background calculation processing, coordinates, rotation angles, scales, light information for adding light and darkness, and projections are applied to the background image and background characters that make up the background image. A process of calculating and deriving various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and a Z test designation is executed.

  After that, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2207, and after the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in step S2208, the effect calculation process is executed (step S2209). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameter information is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  After that, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2210, and a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S2211, and then the symbol calculation process is executed (step S2212). In the symbol calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameter information is performed on a symbol image to be subjected to variable display in each game round.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, the process which updates the parameter information for control start set in step S2201 is performed. In each process of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, animation data set to change various parameter information of an individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing comes is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. In the symbol calculation process, when the execution table for fraud notification or status notification is read to the work RAM 132, the calculation process for displaying a notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

  After that, in step S2213, "1" is set to the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 132, and after executing the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system in step S2214, this task process is terminated. . In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images that are the control update targets by the processes in steps S2206, S2209, and S2212. Execute the process to grasp. The grasp is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S2214. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S2214 is executed. There is no need.

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the delay flag (step S2201: YES), after the delay flag is cleared to “0” in step S2215, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is performed in the previous task processing. The process jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before the start (step S2216). As a result, the execution of the process can be resumed from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task process. The contents of the delayed flag and the calculation completion flag are the same as those in the first embodiment, and in task processing, step S2201, step S2204 to step S2205, step S2207 to step S2208, step S2210 to step S2211, and step S2213 are performed. In addition, the operational effects obtained by executing Steps S2215 to S2216 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

<Basic processing in the VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  In the VDP 135, a process for setting the value of the register 153 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process for creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least processing for outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 43A to 43C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for an image of one frame related to the drawing list. Yes. In addition, various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system are set when creating the drawing data this time, and information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 43A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Yes. Also, as the order after the background image data, the effect image data is set, for example, the effect object A is set as mth, the effect object B is set as m + 1, and so on. Yes. Further, as the order after the effect image data, symbol image data is set, for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B is set as n + 1th,... Yes.

  It should be noted that the order in which the image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above, and the design image The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the predetermined presentation image data and the other presentation image data. May be.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... Multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back surface, as shown in FIG. 43B, the address information of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133, and the back surface information. Information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting image data for use, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back side The rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the system, the scale information indicating the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, Uniform α value information indicating overall transmission information (or transparency information) when image data is set is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. The coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when texture mapping is performed.

  In the parameter information (P1), the camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera when the rear image data is projected onto the drawing virtual two-dimensional plane, and the rear image data are rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case is set.

  In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z buffer method means that each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a depth adjustment processing method in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, the Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition process of the numerical information and the calculation process for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information (P1), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog specification information indicating whether or not fog is applied and the application target are set.

  Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data can be controlled uniformly for all pixels, not finely controlled in units of pixels. In a good situation, it is possible to cope with uniform α values, so that the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in units of pixels.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, when a fog similar to that of other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, another fog is set for the object in a situation where the material is not too dark due to being too dark. It may be configured. Thereby, the effect by setting fog can be acquired, without impairing the said texture.

  With other parameters such as parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the object information and texture are replaced with the image data information for the back of the various types of information shown in FIG. 43 (b). And information are set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas where objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S2302.

  In the setting process for the background, the image data for the back for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character among the image data specified in the current drawing list are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 133 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data so that the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process is performed to convert to a coordinate value of the world coordinate system, and the buffer area is set as described above.

  If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2303, a setting process for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process for erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In the subsequent step S2304, a symbol setting process is executed. In the symbol setting process, object data for displaying symbols is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the symbol image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  As a result of the processing in steps S2302 to S2304, the drawing list designates an arrangement target in the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes, as shown in FIG. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified by the drawing list is completed.

  In FIG. 45, the state in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged is simply shown. Further, the image data PC1 for the rearmost image does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction on the back side with respect to all of the various object data PC2 to PC10. For example, the image data PC1 for the rearmost image It is good also as a structure by which the coordinate of a Z-axis direction becomes a near side rather than some object data by arrange | positioning in the state which was bent or inclined. However, the area of the image data PC1 for the rearmost image in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as this part of the object data, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are behind the object data. As a result, all the object data is not covered by the image data PC1 for the rearmost image.

  In a succeeding step S2305, conversion processing to a camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10), and in fact, there is a camera coordinate system for each individual image. . Thus, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, the viewpoint can be switched individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 45 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In subsequent step S2306, conversion processing to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. Thereby, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In a succeeding step S2307, a clipping process is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2306 is grasped with a corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, extraction is performed in step S2306 with reference to a space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface P of the symbol display device 41). Clip each individual image.

  In a succeeding step S2308, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In a succeeding step S2309, a color information setting process is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing for pasting texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping processing is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2310 and step S2311, each individual image extracted in step S2307 and completed with the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Drawing data is created by performing parallel projection.

  Specifically, in step S2310, a background drawing data creation process is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing for the background is performed by performing projection onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the image data and object data for the backmost image set as the background image. Create data.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 41, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144. The screen buffer 144 has a background buffer into which drawing data for background is written, and drawing data and design for rendering. An effect and a design buffer in which drawing data for writing are collectively written are set. In addition, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the background buffer, the effect, and the design buffer. The background drawing data created in step S2310 is written into the background buffer. If no background image data is specified in the drawing list, no background drawing data is created.

  In a succeeding step S2311, a drawing data creation process for effects and symbols is executed. In the rendering data creation process for effects and symbols, projection is performed on the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the object data set as the effect image and the object data set as the pattern. The rendering data for effects and symbols is created in the buffer for effects and symbols in the buffer 144 for use. If the image data for effects and symbols is not specified in the drawing list, the rendering data for effects and symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, in step S2312, the drawing data synthesis process is executed, and then the drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data composition processing in step S2312, the background drawing data created in the screen buffer 144 individually by the processing in step S2310 and step S2311, and the drawing data for effects and symbols are synthesized. The composite result is written as drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame regions 142a and 142b.

  In this case, the order of writing is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of background drawing data → effect and symbol drawing data. Therefore, the drawing data for background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for effects and symbols is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be rendered, the back image is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The back side image and the near side image are merged at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the near side image is overwritten with the back side image. The blending operation is executed.

  Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion that is not projected in the drawing data for production and design.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame with respect to such a frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. By the switching by the selector circuit, the drawing data The frame regions 142a and 142b that are the drawing targets are restricted so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  Steps S2302 to S2307 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S2308 to S2312 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Configuration for loop production>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop effect will be described.

  The loop effect is an effect in which a moving image in which a loop effect character performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined period including a plurality of image update timings is repeatedly displayed. In the loop effect moving image, the image of the last frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity. Specifically, the image of the last frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity so that the player can recognize that the motion of the loop effect character is a continuous motion. Thus, when the same loop effect moving image is displayed again after the loop effect moving image has made one round, the movement of the loop effect character can be made smooth.

  The contents of the loop effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the moving image display in the loop effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), a plurality of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simultaneously displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 during the loop effect. Specifically, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed simultaneously. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simplified, but the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are the face, the torso, both hands, and both feet. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the person having the is expressed. Also, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are different from each other because at least one of the pattern including the facial expression and the clothes pattern, the outer edge shape, and the size is different. If there is, it is displayed to be recognized by the player. In the loop effect, a moving image is displayed so that the player can recognize that the A character CH8 for loop effect and the B character CH9 for loop effect are performing different actions.

  As the loop effect, a first loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46A and a second loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46B are set. In the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the loop effect A character CH8 performed in one lap of the corresponding loop effect video is shown. The action contents are different, and the action contents of the loop effect B character CH9 performed in one turn of the corresponding loop effect moving image are different. When the loop effect is executed, after the first animation period in which the loop effect movie according to the first loop effect mode is repeated a plurality of times, the loop effect movie according to the second loop effect mode is displayed. A second animation period is repeated a plurality of times.

  The loop effect is executed as an effect for game times, and occurs in a game time that results in a jackpot. The first animation period occurs before the combination of symbols indicating that it is a jackpot result on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, and the second animation period is a symbol that indicates that it is a jackpot result on the display surface P. Occurs after the combination is displayed. Therefore, an action display that is expected to be a jackpot result in the first animation period is performed in each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, and in the second animation period, the jackpot result is displayed. An operation display that congratulates the user is made on the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9.

  When the loop effect is executed as described above, when the loop effect moving image is repeated in each of the first loop effect mode and the second effect mode, the loop effect is generated with the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame. The operation of the A character CH8 for the operation has continuity and the operation of the B character CH9 for the loop effect has the continuity. On the other hand, between the image of the last frame in the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode and the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, the A character CH8 for loop effect The motion does not have continuity, and the motion of the loop effect B character CH9 does not have continuity.

  Therefore, when the second animation period is performed after the first animation period is performed, the data for displaying the image of the last frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect are displayed. The second animation period is started after the interpolation display period in which the interpolation display is performed using the data derived using the data for displaying the image of the start frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the aspect. . Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the loop effect will be described.

  First, a data configuration for executing a loop effect will be described. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration of the memory module 133 for executing the loop effect. As shown in FIG. 47A, in the memory module 133, the first A character for A character for causing the A character CH8 for loop effect to perform the operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode. According to the animation data AD1, the second animation data AD2 for A character for causing the A character CH8 for loop effect to perform the operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, and the first loop effect mode First animation data AD3 for B character for causing the B character CH9 for loop effect to perform an operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect, and an operation display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode. 2nd animation for B character to make B character CH9 for loop production perform And Ndeta AD4, but are stored in advance.

  The animation data AD1 to AD4 are data for determining the coordinates of each vertex in the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In each of the animation data AD1 to AD4, a plurality of pointer information is set so as to be serial numbers, and coordinate data of each vertex in the corresponding object data is set in each pointer information. The pointer information is updated when one frame progresses in a situation where the loop effect is being performed (every time the image update timing is reached), and the coordinate data to be referred to in accordance with the update of the pointer information is in the next order. Will be changed. In this case, the continuous coordinate data is set so as to perform an operation display corresponding to the loop effect moving image corresponding to the corresponding loop effect characters CH8 and CH9.

  As described above, the first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode. Animation data AD2 and AD4 are provided. As described above, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided so as to correspond to the loop effect videos according to the loop effect modes, thereby enabling the loop effect videos to be repeatedly displayed in each period at a time. It becomes possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at a time, it is possible to disperse the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

  Even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and a moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each character CH9. Thereby, the animation data AD1, AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2, AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled individually.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the memory module 133 is provided with a blending table CT in addition to the animation data AD1 to AD4 as data for executing a loop effect. The blending table CT is data that determines the blending ratio between the coordinate data based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at each update timing in the interpolation display period.

  The blending table CT will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the blending table CT, pointer information set in a one-to-one correspondence with all update timings included in the interpolation display period, and coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 at the update timing corresponding to each pointer information And data of the blending ratio of the coordinate data based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4 are set. Specifically, from the start timing to the end timing of the interpolation display period, the blending ratio of the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1, AD3 gradually decreases and the blending ratio of the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2, AD4. The blending table CT is set so that gradually increases. In this case, the blending of the coordinate table by the blending table CT is performed on the coordinate data of the final timing based on the first animation data AD1, AD3 and the coordinate data of the start timing based on the second animation data AD2, AD4. Accordingly, during the interpolation display period, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are displayed as moving images so as to gradually change from the display mode at the final timing of the first animation period to the display mode at the start timing of the second animation period.

  Next, how the loop effect is executed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 48A shows the first animation period, and FIG. 48B shows the timing at which a video for loop effect in the first loop effect mode based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 is newly started. 48 (c) shows an interpolation display period, FIG. 48 (d) shows a second animation period, and FIG. 48 (e) shows a moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Indicates a new start timing.

  The first animation period is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 48A, and the first loop effect is shown at each of the timing t1, the timing t2, and the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 48B. A display cycle of a moving image for loop effect according to the mode is newly started. Thereafter, the first animation period ends at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the display loop of the video for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode started at the timing t3 ends, as shown in FIG. The interpolation display period is started as shown in FIG. The interpolation display period continues until the timing t5.

  When the interpolation display period ends at the timing t5, the second animation period starts as shown in FIG. Then, at each of the timing t5, the timing t6, and the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the display cycle of the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode is newly started. Thereafter, the second animation period is ended as shown in FIG. 48 (d) at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the display loop of the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode started at the timing t7 ends. The

  Incidentally, the continuation period T2 of the interpolation display period is a period effect T1 required for a loop effect moving image in the first animation effect period to make one round in the first animation period and a loop effect in the second animation effect period in the second animation period. It is set to be shorter than the period T3 required for one moving image to go around.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a loop effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 131. The loop effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the loop effect is activated when information on the loop effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the first animation period (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether it is the start timing of the first animation period. If it is the start timing of the first animation period (step S2402: YES), the first animation data AD1 for A character and the first animation data AD3 for B character are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2403). In the following step S2404, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 is grasped. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included. Thereafter, in step S2405, loop effect start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the loop effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402 or if the process of step S2405 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the first animation period, the coordinate data of all vertices set in correspondence with the pointer information at the current update timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character are read out, In the first animation data AD3 for B character, the coordinate data of all vertices set in correspondence with the pointer information at the current update timing is read. The read coordinate data is written in the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132. As a result, the control information is updated. As a result, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated in accordance with the first animation data AD1 for A character, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated in accordance with the first animation data AD3 for B character. It becomes possible.

  In the following step S2408, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, in step S2409, loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If it is an interpolation display period (step S2401: NO, step S2410: YES), an interpolation display period process is executed in step S2411. In the interpolating display period process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, it is first determined in step S2501 whether or not it is the front-side interpolation display start timing.

  In the interpolation display period, as already described, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect A character CH8 is composed of the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the second animation data AD2 for the A character at a predetermined ratio. And the coordinate data of the vertices in the loop effect B character CH9 are blended with the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the second animation data AD4 for the B character at a predetermined ratio. Derived. In this case, the derivation of coordinate data by blending is not started simultaneously for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, but is derived by blending the loop effect A character CH8. Is started first, and at the next image update timing, derivation of coordinate data by blending for the loop effect B character CH9 is started.

  This will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51A shows the image update timing, FIG. 51B shows the first animation period of the A character CH8 for loop effect, and FIG. 51C shows the interpolation display period of the A character CH8 for loop effect. FIG. 51 (d) shows the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9, and FIG. 51 (e) shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect B character CH9.

  Each of the timing t1, the timing t2, the timing t3, and the timing t4 is an image update timing as shown in FIG. In this case, for the loop effect A character CH8, at the timing of t2, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51 (b) and the interpolation display period starts as shown in FIG. 51 (c). The However, at the timing t2, the first animation period is continued for the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, at the timing of t3, which is the update timing after one frame, for the loop effect B character CH9, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first animation period ends and as shown in FIG. 51 (e). The interpolation display period starts.

  Returning to the description of the process for the interpolation display period (FIG. 50), the start timing of the interpolation display period is the start timing of the derivation of the coordinate data by the blending for the loop effect A character CH8. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 and the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, the second animation data AD2 for A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. In step S2503, the blending table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

  In subsequent step S2504, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2505, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for the loop effect A character CH8. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character are stored in the blending table CT. It mixes with the ratio corresponding to the first pointer information. Specifically, the coordinate data of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 and the coordinate data of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 are blended at a ratio of 95: 5 at corresponding vertices. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the blending in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8.

  Thereafter, in step S2506, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing is read in the first animation data AD3 for the B character. Then, the read coordinate data is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 to update the control information. Here, at the last update timing, that is, at the final timing of the first animation period, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character is used as the coordinate data of each vertex of the B character CH9 for loop effect. Is used. Therefore, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is not changed from the immediately preceding update timing.

  In subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2504, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, in step S2508, loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If it is the next image update timing relative to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2501: NO, step S2509: YES), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step). S2510). In step S2511, the blending table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Here, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, as already described, the blending table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character has already been read to the work RAM 132 in step S2503. On the other hand, by newly reading out the blending table CT in step S2511, it is applied to the blending table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character and the animation data AD3 and AD4 for the B character. The combination table CT is read out individually into the work RAM 132. Thereby, even if the composition of the coordinate data using the composition table CT is a configuration in which the A character CH8 for loop effect and the B character CH9 for loop effect are started with a shift of one update timing, It becomes possible to start blending coordinate data from a ratio corresponding to the first pointer information by CT.

  In subsequent step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character are used for loop effect A. In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the blending in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for B character are used as the B character CH9 for loop effect. In the corresponding blending table CT, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the blending in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9.

  In subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the B effect CH9 for loop effect and the area secured. Thereafter, in step S2508, loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If it is the interpolation display period and the update timing is later than the interpolation display start timing on the rear side (step S2501: NO, step S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 without executing the processing of steps S2510 and S2511. . In step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for A character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character are used for loop effect A. In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the blending in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for B character and the coordinate data of each vertex at the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for B character are used as the B character CH9 for loop effect. In the corresponding blending table CT, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the blending in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9.

  In subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the B effect CH9 for loop effect and the area secured. Thereafter, in step S2508, loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  Returning to the description of the calculation process for the loop effect (FIG. 49), when it is the second animation period (step S2401 and step S2410: NO), it corresponds to the current update timing based on the currently set execution target table. The type of image data is grasped (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the loop effect B character CH9. Corresponding texture data is included.

  Thereafter, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the second animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in correspondence with the pointer information at the current update timing in the second animation data AD2 for A character is read, In the second animation data AD4 for B character, the coordinate data of all vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing is read. The read coordinate data is written in the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area secured in correspondence with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132. As a result, the control information is updated. As a result, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated according to the second animation data AD2 for A character, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated according to the second animation data AD4 for B character. It becomes possible.

  In the following step S2408, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived for the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured in association with the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, in step S2409, loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  When the calculation process for the loop effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the loop Information on the texture data corresponding to the effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the use instruction information of the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 is set. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the image data including the coordinate data of each vertex is set. In addition, loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and loop effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the loop effect.

  Next, loop effect setting processing executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The loop effect setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the loop effect setting process is executed.

  When the loop effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2601: YES), the object corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 in the memory module 133 is determined from the address information set in the drawing list. Data, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the address where the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 is stored. Based on the result, these image data are read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S2602).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2602 is executed, in step S2603, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. In step S2604, the coordinate data of the vertices in the world coordinate system for the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data for displaying the loop effect B character CH9 are obtained in this time. From the drawing list, in step S2605, the object data and other parameter information of the corresponding texture data are grasped. In step S2606, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasp results in steps S2603 to S2605.

  By executing the setting process for the loop effect as described above, the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Coordinate data derived from the animation data AD1 to AD4 is applied as the coordinate data of each vertex. Thereby, on the display surface P, the moving image display is performed so that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 operate in a manner corresponding to each of the first animation period, the interpolation display period, and the second animation period. Is called.

  First animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display a loop effect moving image according to the first loop effect aspect, and second animation data AD2 to display a loop effect moving image according to the second loop effect aspect. , AD4 are provided. As described above, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided so as to correspond to the loop effect videos according to the loop effect modes, thereby enabling the loop effect videos to be repeatedly displayed in each period at a time. It becomes possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at a time, it is possible to disperse the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

  Even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and a moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each character CH9. Thereby, the animation data AD1, AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2, AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled individually.

  The first animation data is between a first animation period in which a video for loop effect in the first loop effect mode is displayed and a second animation period in which a video for loop effect in the second loop effect mode is displayed. An interpolation display period is set in which moving image display is performed using coordinate data derived by blending coordinate data by AD1, AD3 and coordinate data by second animation data AD2, AD4 at a predetermined ratio. Thus, the second animation from the first animation period can be performed without ensuring the continuity of the action display of the loop effect characters CH8, CH9 between the first animation data AD1, AD2 and the second animation data AD2, AD4. It is possible to ensure the continuity of the action display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 during the transition to the period.

  The timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect A character CH8, and the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect B character CH9. The update timing is set differently. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period from becoming extremely large.

  The first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing with respect to the timing when the first animation period ends for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period starts. The display period begins. Thereby, even if it is the structure which makes the start timing of an interpolation display period differ by A character CH8 for loop effects, and B character CH9 for loop effects, when the 2nd animation period is started in A character CH8 for loop effects Can start the second animation period in the loop effect B character CH9 at an early stage.

  The same blending table CT is used in both the interpolation display period for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period for the loop effect B character CH9. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data necessary for executing the interpolation display period.

<Another configuration of the loop production>
-When a loop effect is executed, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which both the first animation period and the second animation period are always generated. The first animation period occurs as an effect, but the second animation period does not occur. In the game times that result in the jackpot, the second animation period is provided after the first animation period as the reach display effect in the effect for game times. It is good also as composition which generates. In this case, since only a case where the first animation period occurs as a loop effect and a case where the second animation period occurs after the first animation period can occur, the animation data is referred to as the first animation data AD1, AD3. It is preferable to distinguish between the second animation data AD2 and AD4. In the configuration in which the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided for the first animation period and the second animation period as described above, the actions of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are smooth as in the above embodiment. It is preferable to set the interpolation display period as much as possible.

  For the A character CH8 for loop effect, the first animation period ends for the B character CH9 for loop effect at the next image update timing with respect to the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started, and after the update timing for a plurality of times with respect to the former timing, the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect B character CH9. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The start timing of the process for deriving the coordinate data by combining the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1, AD3 and the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2, AD4 at a predetermined ratio is the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop. In an arrangement different from that of the effect B character CH9, an interpolating display period in which coordinate data derived by blending is used is simultaneously started for the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. It is good also as a structure. Thereby, it is possible to simultaneously start the operation of the interpolation display period in the appearance of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect character CH9 while distributing the processing load.

<Another form of processing for interpolation display period>
In the above embodiment, the end timing of the first animation period is determined in advance, and the loop effect is executed based on the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. However, instead of this, the timing at which the first animation period ends may vary, so that each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period may change. The coordinate data may be changed every time the loop effect is executed. A specific configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex can change as described above will be described in detail below.

  In the present embodiment, the effect operating device operated by the player is electrically connected to the sound emission control device 60, and the effect operating device is operated during the execution of the first animation period. When the side MPU 62 specifies the corresponding command, the corresponding command is transmitted to the display CPU 131. When the display CPU 131 receives the command, the first animation period is ended and the second animation period is executed after the interpolation display period is executed. To start. For example, in the game times that result in a loss, the first animation period occurs as a reach display effect in the effect for game times, but the second animation period does not occur. When applied to a configuration in which the second animation period occurs after the first animation period as the reach display effect in the rendition effect, the timing at which the effect operating device is operated in the first animation period in the game times that results in the jackpot Accordingly, it is possible to vary the start timing of the second animation period that is a definite notification that the jackpot result will be obtained. In this case, it is possible to notify the confirmation at the timing corresponding to the operation timing of the effect operating device while using the loop effect.

  In the configuration in which the timing at which the first animation period ends may vary as described above, the operation mode of the loop effect A character CH8 and the operation mode of the loop effect B character CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period also vary. obtain. Then, when the start timing of the interpolation display period is set to a different update timing for the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the operation modes of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period Accordingly, it is preferable to change the target for starting the interpolation display period first.

  Specifically, among the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the change operation of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the end timing of the first animation period and the start timing of the second animation period. The amount of operation at one update timing in the interpolation display period is larger on the side with the larger amount than on the side with the smaller amount of change operation. Then, it is preferable that the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with the larger amount of change motion have more image update timings in the interpolation display period. On the other hand, even if the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, the end timing of the interpolation display period is the same for each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. Therefore, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the end timing of the interpolation display period is late have a smaller number of image update timings occurring in the interpolation display period than on the earlier side. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interpolation display period is started first from the side with the larger amount of change motion in relation to the end timing of the first animation period among the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. .

  As data for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for starting the interpolation display period first in relation to the end timing of the first animation period, in this embodiment, the memory module 133 is used for determining the start start target. A table PDT is stored in advance. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first start target determination table PDT.

  In the first start target determination table PDT, the range of the number of frames that can occur as the first animation period (number of times of image update timing) and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first. Is previously determined. The correspondence relationship is as follows. In the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the operation mode of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at each update timing of the first animation period and each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. It is determined by comparing with the operation mode. Specifically, the number of frames in the first animation period is the first start side for the 0th frame (start timing frame) to the 49th frame, the 100th frame to the 149th frame, and the 200th frame to the 249th frame. A loop effect B character CH9 is set as the character. On the other hand, the number of frames in the first animation period is looped as the first character for the 50th to 99th frame, 150th to 199th frame, and 250th to 299th frame (final timing frame). An effect A character CH8 is set.

  A processing configuration for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period starts first using the destination start target determination table PDT will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the interpolating display period process executed by the display CPU 72. The process for the interpolation display period is after the production operating device is operated in the middle of the first animation period or after the final timing of the first animation period, until the end timing of the interpolation display period. This is executed every time the calculation process for the loop effect (FIG. 49) is activated.

  If it is the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: YES), the pre-start target determination table PDT is read from the memory module 133, and the character whose current start frame number in the first animation period is the pre-start side character A It is determined whether or not the number of frames corresponding to character CH8 is supported (step S2702). When it corresponds to the number of frames in which the first character on the start side is the loop effect A character CH8 (step S2702: YES), the second animation data AD2 for A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2703). ). On the other hand, when the number of frames corresponding to the first character on the start side is the loop effect B character CH9 (step S2702: NO), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 ( Step S2704). When the process of step S2703 is executed or when the process of step S2704 is executed, the blending table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2705.

  In a succeeding step S2706, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Thereafter, in step S2707, coordinate data update processing according to the blending table CT is executed for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side that starts the interpolation display period first. Further, in step S2708, the same coordinate data as the coordinate data at the immediately previous update timing is grasped for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that have not started the interpolation display period first. Thereafter, update processing of other parameters is executed in step S2709, and loop effect designation information is stored in step S2710. Each processing content of these step S2706-step S2710 is the same as the processing content of step S2504-step S2508 of the process for interpolation display periods (FIG. 50) in the said embodiment.

  When it is the next image update timing with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: NO, step S2711: YES), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that have not become the side for starting the interpolation display period first. Are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2712). Specifically, when the process of step S2703 is executed in the process time of the immediately preceding interpolation display period process, the second animation data AD4 for B character is read, and the process of the immediately preceding interpolation display period process is performed. If the process of step S2704 is executed at the time, the second animation data AD2 for A character is read. Thereafter, the blending table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2713.

  In subsequent step S2714, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Thereafter, in step S2715, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Thereafter, update processing of other parameters is executed in step S2709, and loop effect designation information is stored in step S2710. The processing contents of steps S2709 to S2710 and S2714 to S2715 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2507 to S2508 and steps S2512 to S2513 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment. . Further, the processing content when a negative determination is made in step S2711 is the same as the processing content when a negative determination is made in step S2509 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

  According to this form, the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first depend on the operation mode of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, not only can the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period be reduced, but also the interpolation display can be performed in a manner corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the first animation period can be changed, the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period is reduced while smoothly performing the interpolation display of the characters CH8 and CH9 for loop effects. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the type corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first is preset as the first start target determination table PDT, the interpolation display is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load in the case of determining the type of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the period first.

<Another form of processing for interpolation display period>
The type of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolation display period first is not limited to the configuration set in advance as the first start target determination table PDT. For example, in the first animation period The end of the first animation period from the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing and the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. The motion amount of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 from the timing to the start timing of the second animation period is derived by calculation, and the interpolated display period precedes the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with the larger derived motion amount. It is good also as a structure which starts.

  Instead of the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the movement amount from the end timing of the first animation period to the start timing of the second animation period is large, the movement amount is small. The interpolation display period may be started first from the side loop effect characters CH8 and CH9.

<Configuration for performing the bone model display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 55A and FIG. 55B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the bone model display.

  Bone model display means that when a bone display character CH10 representing a person or the like is displayed in 3D as shown in FIG. 55 (a), a plurality of bones are displayed as object data as shown in FIG. This is display content using skeleton data FRD1 having data BOD and a plurality of joint data JOD and skin data SKD1 set in association with skeleton data FRD1 and representing a skin portion. The bone data BOD corresponds to a bone portion of the bone display character CH10, and the joint data JOD corresponds to a joint portion connecting a plurality of bone data BOD. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and orientation data of the bone data BOD with reference to the joint data JOD, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD in the skin data SKD1 set in association with the skeleton data FRD1 is changed. Accordingly, the form of the bone display character CH10 is changed. In FIG. 55 (b), a part of the skin data is omitted.

  A plurality of bone data BODs have a parent-child relationship, and when the parent target bone data BOD moves, the parent target bone data BOD follows the parent target bone data BOD and changes to a child target relationship. A certain bone data BOD moves. In the bone display character CH10, the bone data corresponding to the spine portion is set as the main parent target bone data BOD as the highest parent target, and the main parent target bone data BOD is set via the joint data JOD. All the bone data BODs connected in this manner correspond to the child target bone data BOD. Also, in the bone data BOD of the child target, the bone data BOD on the side closer to the main parent target bone data BOD is located farther between the bone data BODs arranged in a row from the main parent target bone data BOD. It becomes a parent target relationship with the bone data BOD. Therefore, when the main parent target bone data BOD is moved, the other bone data BOD is also moved in accordance with the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1. Even if the main parent target bone data BOD does not move, the bone data BOD in the parent target relationship among the plurality of bone data BODs arranged in a row from the main parent target bone data BOD moves. On the other hand, the bone data BOD having a child object relationship also moves according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1.

  Skin data SKD1 has a large number of vertex data TD, one polygon is defined by three or four vertex data TD, and skin data SKD1 is expressed by a large number of polygons. Each vertex data TD is associated with one or a plurality of bone data BOD according to the skin weight data SWD1. Thereby, when the bone data BOD is moved, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD is changed according to the skin weighting data SWD1, and the skin data SKD1 is deformed accordingly, and finally the mode according to the operation of the bone data BOD. Thus, the bone display character CH10 operates and the skin portion of the bone display character CH10 is deformed.

  In the bone model display effect, a plurality of bone display characters including the bone display character CH10 are displayed. A data structure for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration for performing bone model display.

  As shown in FIG. 56, each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skeleton data FRD1 of the bone display character CH10 is stored in the memory module 133 as an area for storing image data for bone model display. Skeleton data storage area 161 in which skeleton data corresponding to each of the bones is stored in advance, and skin data storage in which skin data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including skin data SKD1 of bone display character CH10 are stored in advance. An area 162 and a texture data storage area 163 in which texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the texture data BTD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance are provided. Skeletal data and skin data are as described above. The texture data BTD1 is data for determining the color information of the bone display character CH10, and the color information is determined in relation to the vertex data of the skin data SKD1. Therefore, the bone display character CH10 can be displayed by applying the texture data BTD1 after applying the skin data SKD1 to the skeleton data FRD1. These skeleton data FRD1, skin data SKD1, and texture data BTD1 are used by the VDP 135.

  The memory module 133 stores control data in addition to image data as data for performing bone model display. As an area for storing the control data, bone weight data storage area 164 in which bone weight data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including bone weight data BWD1 of bone display character CH10 is stored in advance. A skin weight data storage area 165 in which skin weight data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skin weight data SWD1 of the bone display character CH10 and a bone animation of the bone display character CH10 are stored. A bone animation data storage area 166 in which bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the data BAD1 is stored in advance is provided.

  The bone weighting data BWD1 defines the relationship between the parent object and the child object in the plurality of bone data BOD included in the skeleton data FRD1, and the amount of movement when the parent object bone data BOD is moved to the child object bone data BOD. Determine the ratio of reflection. Skin weighting data SWD1 defines a correspondence relationship between bone data BOD and each vertex data of skin data SKD1, and also defines a ratio when the amount of movement when bone data BOD moves is reflected in each vertex data.

  The bone animation data BAD1 is data for determining the coordinates of the bone data BOD at each update timing in order to cause the bone display character CH10 to perform a predetermined operation over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of pointer information is set in the bone animation data BAD1 so as to be serial numbers, and each of the pointer information is the current coordinate data from the previous coordinate data for the bone data BOD to be moved. Difference data is set. In this case, the bone data BOD to be set for the difference data is set only for a part of the bone data BOD necessary for determining the rough movement of the bone display character CH10, and the remaining data is set. For the bone data BOD, coordinate data is determined according to the bone weighting data BWD1. In addition, even if the bone data BOD is the target for setting the difference data, if the bone data BOD has a child target relationship with the other bone data BOD, not only the difference data defined by the bone animation data BAD1, Coordinate data is determined according to the coordinate data of the parent target bone data BOD and the bone weighting data BWD1.

  Here, when displaying each bone display character CH10, the coordinate data of each bone data BOD of the corresponding skeleton data FRD1 is determined by calculation. In the skeleton data FRD1, a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. Specifically, 50 bone data of first to 50th bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set. The bone display character CH10 displayed in the bone model display effect has a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 within a maximum of 50 ranges. As an area for calculating the coordinate data of each of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50, the work RAM 132 is provided with a coordinate calculation area 169 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The coordinate calculation area 169 includes 50 unit calculation areas corresponding to the maximum number of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 of the bone display character CH10, and each unit calculation area has a one-to-one correspondence. Addresses (first to 50th addresses) are set.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a bone model display effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the bone model display effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the bone model display effect is activated when information on the bone model display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the start timing of the bone model display effect (step S2801: YES), control data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed in the current bone model display effect is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work. Read to RAM132. Specifically, bone weighting data, skin weighting data, and bone animation data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are read (step S2802). In the subsequent step S2803, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying each of the plurality of bone display characters is grasped. The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters. Thereafter, in step S2804, start designation information of the bone model display effect for allowing the VDP 135 to recognize that the bone model display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2801, or if the processing of step S2804 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2805). The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters.

  After that, in step S2806, a value corresponding to the number of bone display characters that are currently displayed is set in the bone model number counter provided in the work RAM 132. In a succeeding step S2807, a setting process to a unit bone number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is executed. In the setting process to the unit bone number counter, the number of bone data included in the skeleton data of the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter is set to the unit bone number counter.

  Thereafter, in step S2808, “0” is cleared for each unit calculation area included in the coordinate calculation area 169 of the work RAM 132. In the following step S2809, the coordinate data set at the previous update timing of each bone data in the bone display character that is the current coordinate calculation target is read out from the area secured in correspondence with the bone display character. The coordinate calculation area 169 is set in the corresponding unit calculation area.

  Thereafter, coordinate calculation processing is executed in step S2810. The coordinate calculation process is executed for all bone data corresponding to the bone display character that is the current coordinate calculation target, but the execution order is the bone data of the main parent target first, and then the parent data It is performed in order from bone data having a high priority as a target. As a result, the coordinate data of the main parent target bone data is calculated first, and then the coordinate data is calculated in order from the parent target bone data closer to the main parent target bone data. The coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

  The coordinate calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. If the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter is not the main parent target bone data (step S2901: NO), in step S2902, the bone data having a parent target relationship with the current bone data. The coordinate data newly calculated for the current update timing and the coordinate data set at the previous update timing (that is, written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169). Current coordinate data) and the calculated difference data and the bone weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. Calculate difference data of coordinate data to be applied to dataThen, the difference data is converted into coordinate data at the previous update timing in the current calculation target bone data (that is, coordinate data written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169). ) To calculate new coordinate data. The calculated coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current bone data to be calculated in the coordinate calculation area 169.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2902 is executed, the current calculation is performed on the bone animation data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter in step S2903. It is determined whether difference data is set for the target bone data. If difference data is set (step S2903: YES), the difference data set in the bone animation data in step S2904 is converted into the unit corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169. This is applied to the coordinate data written in the calculation area, and the coordinate data after the application is written in the unit calculation area.

  Returning to the description of the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58), after the coordinate calculation process is executed in step S2810, the value of the unit bone number counter in the work RAM 132 is decremented by 1 in step S2811. If the value of the unit bone number counter after the subtraction is 1 or more (step S2812: NO), coordinate calculation processing (step S2810) is performed on bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter.

  If the value of the unit bone number counter is “0” (step S2812: YES), it means that the coordinate calculation processing of all bone data has been completed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. To do. In this case, a coordinate data update process is executed in step S2813. In the coordinate data update process, the coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing written in the unit calculation area of the coordinate calculation area 169 is associated with the bone display character that is the current calculation target in the work RAM 132. Write to the reserved area.

  In a succeeding step S2814, a skin data coordinate calculation process is executed. In the skin data coordinate calculation process, referring to the skin weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, it is made to correspond to the coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character. Coordinate data of each vertex data of the skin data is calculated. Then, the coordinate data is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the bone display character that is the current calculation target.

  In the following step S2815, parameter information other than the coordinate data of the bone data and the coordinate data of the skin data is calculated and derived for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, and the derived parameter information is In the work RAM 132, the data is written in an area secured in correspondence with the bone display character that is the current calculation target.

  Thereafter, in step S2816, 1 is subtracted from the value of the bone model number counter of the work RAM 132. When the value of the bone model number counter after the subtraction is 1 or more (step S2817: NO), the processing of steps S2807 to S2816 is executed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. . When the value of the bone model number counter is “0” (step S2817: YES), in step S2818, designation information of the bone model display effect for allowing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the bone model display effect. Store in the register of the display CPU 131.

  When the calculation process for the bone model display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed. Corresponding skeleton data, skin data, and texture data use instruction information are set. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to each image data is set including the coordinate data of bone data and the coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data in each bone display character. In addition, bone model display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and bone model display effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the bone model display effect.

  Next, the setting process for the bone model display effect executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the bone model display effect is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Also, when the bone model display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the bone model display effect is executed.

  When the start specification information of the bone model display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3001: YES), the memory module 133 becomes the current display target from the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the skeleton data, skin data and texture data corresponding to a plurality of bone display characters are stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, these image data are stored in the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. Read (step S3002).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or if the process of step S3002 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped in step S3003. In step S3004, coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each bone data corresponding to each bone display character that is a display target is grasped from the current drawing list. The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each vertex data of the skin data corresponding to each of the bone display characters is grasped from the current drawing list, and each bone display to be displayed is displayed in step S3006. The other parameter information about the character for use is grasped from the current drawing list. In step S3007, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasp results in steps S3003 to S3006.

  By executing the setting process for the bone model display effect as described above, the skeleton data and the skin data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters that are currently displayed are arranged in the world coordinate system. In addition, coordinate data derived using bone weighting data, skin weighting data and bone animation data is applied as coordinate data of each bone data and skin data. Thereby, on the display surface P, a moving image is displayed so that a plurality of bone display characters operate.

<Description of Set Unit Characters CHG1 to CHG5>
Here, a collective character group CHG is set as one type of bone display character. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the collective character group CHG.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the collective character group CHG includes a plurality (specifically, five) of collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. As shown in FIG. 61 (b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 has a set skeleton data FRD2 having a plurality of bone data ABD and a plurality of joint data AJD, set skin data SKD2, and set data. Displayed using the texture data BTD2. By executing the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58) and the setting process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 60) already described for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, the predetermined coordinate data is set. The collective skin data SKD2 is applied to the collective skeleton data FRD2, and the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed in 3D in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 61 (b). Then, drawing is performed while applying the set texture data BTD2 to the image of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 61 (a). These data FRD2, SKD2, and BTD2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG.

  Each of the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that the characters have the same shape, pattern and size, as shown in FIG. 61 (a). These set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, for example, perform specific actions around the bone display character CH10 in a situation where the bone display character CH10 is displayed on the display surface P so as to perform a predetermined action. It is displayed on the display surface P. In this case, while the bone display character CH10 performs an action display indicating the expected degree of grant such as a jackpot result, the action display indicating such an expected degree of grant is performed in the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. I will not. Then, when the bone model display effect is executed, the player pays attention to the bone display character CH10. Under such circumstances, the bone display character CH10 requires fine movement, whereas the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 do not require fine movement. Therefore, the number of bone data ABD of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set to be smaller than the number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10, and is further necessary to display each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. A device for reducing the amount of data and a device for reducing the processing load for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are provided.

  Hereinafter, the data structure for displaying each set unit character CHG1-CHG5 is demonstrated in detail. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the skeleton data FRD2 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. FIGS. 63A to 63C show the bone display character CH10 and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the number of bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, and the number of bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3. The number of bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the number of bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 are all 10, and all the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is 50. Then, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are set to be aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2.

  The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same as the total number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a-1) and 63 (a-2), only one character, bone display character CH10, is displayed by the skeleton data FRD1, and the first to fifth skeleton data FRD2 are used. Despite being able to display five characters, the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the skeleton data FRD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 and the collective skeleton data for displaying the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 The amount of data is the same or substantially the same as FRD2. In this case, it is possible to reduce the data capacity compared to a configuration in which the same number of bone data as the bone display character CH10 is set corresponding to each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Each skeleton data FRD1, FRD2 is accompanied by header data referred to by the VDP 135, but the skeleton data is not set individually for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, but one set skeleton. By consolidating as data FRD2, it is possible to reduce such accompanying data.

  The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is 50, and these bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2. In the calculation process (FIG. 58), the calculation of the coordinate data of each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is performed in the same manner as the bone data of one bone display character.

  Specifically, in the calculation process for bone display effect (FIG. 58), as already described, the coordinate data of each bone data is derived in the calculation, and this calculation includes the one skeleton data. The bone data is read together and processed together (steps S2808 to S2813). In this calculation process, the coordinate calculation area 169 provided in the work RAM 132 is used. The coordinate calculation area 169 can store data for calculating the coordinate data of each bone data. The number of calculation areas is 50. On the other hand, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are set as one set of the skeleton data FRD2 as described above, and the total number of the bone data ABD1 to ADB50 is the coordinate. The total number of unit calculation areas in the calculation area 169 is less than or equal to the total number. Therefore, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 can be read at a time and the calculation process can be executed. Therefore, data is individually read for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and after the calculation of the coordinate data of bone data for one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is completed, the next set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

  In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are set to be aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2, the characters having different relationships between the parent and child targets of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 Is set between. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same, and further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Since the arrangement modes of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are the same, the skeletons of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape and the same size. In this case, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 included in the same group G1 to G10 in FIG. 62 correspond to the skeleton portions at the same positions in the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. For example, the first bone data ABD1, the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 included in the first group G1 are respectively in the corresponding set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. It corresponds to the skeleton of the head, and the 10th bone data ABD10, 20th bone data ABD20, 30th bone data ABD30, 40th bone data ABD40 and 50th bone data ABD50 included in the 10th group G10 correspond respectively. The set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 correspond to the skeleton portion of the right foot.

  In each of the groups G1 to G10, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set to have a parent object relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. Yes. For example, in the first group G1, the first bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1 is the 11th bone data ABD11, 21st bone data ABD21, and 31st bone data ABD31 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. The 41th bone data ABD41 is set to have a parent object relationship.

  On the other hand, in other cases, the relationship between the parent object and the child object is the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the same set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the different set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Is not set. For example, the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the first to tenth bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. Further, for example, a parent object and a child object between the 11th bone data ABD11, 21st bone data ABD21, 31st bone data ABD31 and 41st bone data ABD41 of the 2nd to 5th set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 in the first group G1 The relationship with is not set.

  In the configuration in which the relationship between the parent object and the child object is set as described above, the set bone weighting data BWD2 (see FIG. 56) stored in the memory module 133 is the bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1. When difference data of coordinate data is applied to any one of ABD10, other set unit characters CHG2 included in the same group G1 to G10 as bone data ABD1 to ABD10 to which the difference data is applied. It is set to be applied as it is to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of CHG5. Accordingly, the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 follow the first set unit character CHG1 when the first set unit character CHG1 moves.

  On the other hand, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 has moved. However, the other bone data ABD1 to ABD10 do not move following it. The same applies to the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. Further, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, for example, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 is set. Is moved, the bone data ABD31 to ABD50 of the third to fifth set unit characters CHG3 to CHG5 do not move following the movement. As a matter of course, since the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are in a parent object relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, the second set unit character CHG2 Even if the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 move, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 does not move following it.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are referred to for the contents of the collective bone animation data BAD2 for operating the collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5 and the operation contents of the collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5 when the collective bone animation data BAD2 is used. While explaining. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view for explaining the bone animation data for collection BAD2, and FIG. 65 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation content of each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

  As shown in FIG. 64, pointer information corresponding to one update timing of the image is set in the collective bone animation data BAD2, and difference data is set corresponding to each pointer information. For the pointer information “0” to “m”, difference data is set only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. The difference data corresponds to data that is moved in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1.

  During the period in which such difference data is set, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. Specifically, at the initial display positions of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-1), the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are predetermined in a state in which they have the same shape. It is lined up at equal intervals in the direction. In this case, when the difference data set in the pointer information of “0” to “m” is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the difference data is directly stored in the second to second data. Since it is applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 maintains the shape and the interval in one direction. Moving.

  Returning to the description of the collective bone animation data BAD2 shown in FIG. 64, the pointer information of “m + 1” to “n” is not only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first collective unit character CHG1, but Difference data is also set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. The difference data corresponds to data that moves in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1, and maintains the shape of the second set unit character CHG2 and the fourth set unit character CHG4. This corresponds to data that is moved in the direction opposite to the one direction, and corresponds to data that changes the shape of the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5.

  During the period in which such difference data is set, the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed as moving images as shown in FIG. Specifically, from the state where each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (b-1), the first to fifth set unit characters as shown in FIG. 65 (b-2). The distance between the second set unit character CHG2 and the third set unit character CHG3 and the distance between the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 while moving in one direction as a whole of CHG1 to CHG5. And the shapes of the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 are changed.

  Next, the data amounts of the collection skin data SKD2 and the collection texture data BTD2 will be described.

  For the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, common set skin data SKD2 is set and common set texture data BTD2 is set. That is, the collective skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Furthermore, the collection skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to 10 bone data. When the collection skin data SKD2 is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one collection skin data SKD2 read from the memory module 133 is the first. This is applied to each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

  The coordinate data of each vertex data ATD of the collection skin data SKD2 for performing the application is determined by referring to the collection skin weight data SWD2 stored in the memory module 133. In the set skin weighting data SWD2, the correspondence between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 and the set skin data SKD2, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 and the set skin data SKD2 , The correspondence between the bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3 and the skin data SKD2 for gathering, the correspondence between the bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the skin data SKD2 for gathering The correspondence relationship between the bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth collective unit character CHG5 and the collective skin data SKD2 is set.

  In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the set skin data SKD2 is bone data of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. By being set as data applied to ABD1 to ABD50, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b-1) and 63 (b-2), the skin data SKD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 is displayed. On the other hand, the collection skin data SKD2 has a data amount of 1/5.

  Similarly, the collective texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5. When the collective texture data BTD2 is applied to display the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one collective texture data BTD2 read from the memory module 133 is the first to fifth collective unit characters. This is applied to each of CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63 (c-1) and 63 (c-2), the texture data BTD2 for collection is 1/5 of the texture data BTD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10. The amount of data.

  In the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58), when the coordinate data of the bone data of a plurality of bone display characters is calculated, the data corresponding to the bone data included in one skeleton data is calculated by the coordinate calculation of the work RAM 132. The data is read in the area 169 and coordinate data is calculated for the bone data, and then the bone data coordinate data is calculated for the next skeleton data. As a result, the calculation of coordinate data is performed in units of one skeleton data, and various settings for calculating the coordinate data of bone data included in one skeleton data are executed in multiple times. In comparison, the processing load can be reduced in that the number of executions of the processes in steps S2808 and S2809 can be suppressed.

  For a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 that do not require fine movement control, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is reduced, and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are one. The aggregate skeleton data FRD2 is aggregated and set. Thereby, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the plurality of collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to perform coordinate calculation of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 collectively, and the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. The processing load can be reduced compared to a configuration in which various settings for calculating coordinate data are performed every time.

  In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are the second to fifth sets. The parent character relationship is set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. As a result, all the first to fifth collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are moved together by simply setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first collective unit character CHG1 in the collective bone animation data BAD2. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to move the first to fifth collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 integrally while suppressing the data amount of the collective bone animation data BAD2. On the other hand, it is possible to adjust the coordinate data of the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of each child object without affecting the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the parent object. As a result, it is possible to move all of the first to fifth collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 integrally by simply setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first collective unit character CHG1 as described above. However, the display positions of the second to fifth collective unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 can be individually changed.

  The collective skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to one collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same collective skin data SKD2 is applied to each collective unit character CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing skin data in advance. Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set texture data BTD2 is applied to each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. The This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity necessary for storing texture data in advance.

<Another form of configuration related to bone model display effect>
The total number of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the collective unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller or larger than the total number of the bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the number of unit calculation areas in the coordinate calculation area 169.

  -It is good also as a structure by which the relationship of a parent object and a child object is set between the bone data ABD1-ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1-CHG5. In this case, it is possible to more realistically represent the actions of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

  A configuration in which a relationship between a parent object and a child object is set between bone data included in the first skeleton data and bone data included in the second skeleton data may be adopted. In this case, when one of the character displayed by the first skeleton data and the character displayed by the second skeleton data is moved, the other character can be moved following the movement. .

  The number and arrangement mode of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are not limited to the same in each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and at least one of the number and arrangement mode of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. However, it is good also as a structure where the number and arrangement | sequence aspect are substantially the same.

  In the calculation process for the bone model display effect in the display CPU 131 (FIG. 58), the parameter information calculated for a plurality of individual images after setting to the pre-derivation state in steps S2808 and S2809 is coordinate data of skeleton data However, the parameter information may be other parameter information such as rotation angle, scale, light information, and camera information.

<Configuration for plane shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing plane shadow display will be described. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the plane shadow display. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the plane shadow display.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the plane shadow display means that an effect character CH11 that is recognized by the player when a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet is expressed is walking. In the situation where the moving moving image is being displayed, the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 is displayed on the ground image BG representing the ground. The display content of the shadow image CH12 changes in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the display content in which the effect character CH11 puts out the left arm and puts out the right arm, a shadow image CH12 having a shape corresponding to that is displayed. In the display contents where the effect character CH11 puts out the right arm and puts out the left arm as shown, a shadow image CH12 having a shape corresponding to that is displayed.

  As image data for displaying the effect character CH11, as shown in FIG. 67, the memory module 133 stores character object data COD and character texture data CTD in advance. In addition, as image data for displaying the ground image BG, the memory module 133 stores ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD in advance. Further, as the image data for displaying the shadow image CH12, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  In displaying the shadow image CH12, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD in the world coordinate system includes character object data COD for displaying the effect character CH11 and ground object data BGD for displaying the ground image BG. It is arranged between. The plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is object data that is configured in a flat shape without a wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. is there. Then, the shadow image CH12 is displayed by applying the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD.

  The plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position spaced apart from the ground object data BGD by a distance X (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system. Character object data COD is arranged above the object data BSD. Thus, by arranging the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD at a position spaced upward from the ground object data BGD, the shadow image CH12 is reliably displayed above the ground image BG. Plural types of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are set. Specifically, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in FIG. Second plane shadow texture data BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in b) is set.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing plane shadow display will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU 131. The plane shadow display calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for plane shadow display is started when information about plane shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3101: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3102). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1, and second data. Plane shadow texture data BST2 is included. After that, in step S3103, the start designation information for plane shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3101, or if the process of step S3103 is executed, in step S3104, the ground object data BGD and the ground use data are used as current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. Grasping texture data BGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3105). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3106, based on the currently set execution target table, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data COD and CTD. (Step S3107). In this case, the character for presentation CH11 is displayed as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S3108, based on the currently set execution target table, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped as the current target data. In a succeeding step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. The first shadow display period is a period in which the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used as texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12, and the second shadow display period is as texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12. This is a period during which the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is used. When it is the first shadow display period (step S3109: YES), the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is grasped at step S3110, and when it is the second shadow display period (step S3109: NO), at step S3111. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 is grasped.

  These first shadow display period and second shadow display period are the image data for displaying the shadow image CH12 when the effect character CH11 is in the first display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (a). To display the shadow image CH12 when the first plane shadow texture data BST1 corresponding to the first display mode is used and the effect character CH11 is in the second display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (b). The second plane shadow texture data BST2 corresponding to the second display mode is used as the image data. In other words, when the display character CH11 is displayed so as to move, when the display mode is alternately switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, the usage target is adjusted in accordance with the switching of the display mode. The plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are switched.

  When the process of step S3110 is executed or when the process of step S3111 is executed, parameter information is obtained for the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD and the current plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 in step S3112. It is derived by calculation, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with these image data BSD, BST1, and BST2. Thereafter, in step S 3113, plane shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  In this case, as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the shadow image CH12 is displayed below the effect character CH11. As possible, the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the character object data COD acquired in step S3107 is determined. Also, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the ground data grasped in step S3105 so that the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the ground image BG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD.

  Here, as already described, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, and the application position is determined using the UV coordinate data. Specifically, base UV coordinate data is set in the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, and UV coordinate data is set in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2. The color information of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is applied so that the UV coordinate data of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 corresponds to the base UV coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD. In this case, since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2, the display CPU 131 cannot change the UV coordinate data. On the other hand, the base UV coordinate data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD can be changed by the display CPU 131, but the base UV coordinate data is not changed in the execution period of the planar shadow display. For example, the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data are constant in both the first shadow display period and the second shadow display period. Thus, even if the effect character CH11 is displayed to move and the coordinate data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed accordingly, the planar shadow at each pixel of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed. The application target of the texture data BST1, BST2 is not changed.

  When the plane shadow display calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, Information on the use instruction of the ground object data BGD, the ground texture data BGTD, and the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is set, and the first flat shadow texture data BST1 is used during the first shadow display period. In the second shadow display period, information on the instruction to use the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Also, plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and plane shadow display start designation information is set at the start timing of plane shadow display.

  Next, the setting process for plane shadow display executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The plane shadow display setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for plane shadow display is executed.

  When the plane shadow display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S3201: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target from the address information set in the drawing list. The address where the various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasp result, the various image data is read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3202). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1, and second data. Plane shadow texture data BST2 is included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3202 is executed, the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list in step S3203. . In step S3204, the parameter information of the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S3205, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3206, the parameter information of the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, the production character CH11 is displayed as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). Various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD is obtained.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3208, the coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the coordinates in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD for displaying the shadow image CH12 below the effect character CH11. Know the data. Also, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the ground data grasped in step S3204 so that the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the ground image BG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD. In step S3209, parameter information other than the coordinate data is grasped for the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD based on the current drawing list. In this case, the fixed base UV coordinate data applied to the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped based on the drawing list.

  Thereafter, in step S3210, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 corresponding to the current shadow display period are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3211, fixed UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is determined from the texture data BST1 and BST2. In step S3212, parameter information other than the UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped based on the current drawing list.

  Thereafter, in step S3213, a setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasp results in steps S3203 to S3212.

  By executing the setting process for plane shadow display as described above, the ground object data BGD, the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131. Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each object data BGD, COD, BSD. Corresponding texture data BGTD, CTD, BST1, and BST2 are applied to each object data BGD, COD, and BSD. Thereby, on the display surface P, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), a moving image display in which the effect character CH11 is walking and moving on the ground image BG is performed and for the effect. A moving image display is performed such that the shadow image CH12 follows while the character CH11 moves in accordance with the movement of the character CH11.

  As described above, when the shadow image CH12 is displayed so as to follow the effect character CH11, the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD and the plane shadow plate-like object is arranged. In this configuration, plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the data BSD. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the shadow image is displayed by calculation in relation to the light source data. Further, a configuration in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are directly applied to the ground object data BGD is also assumed. However, since the ground texture data BGTD is applied to the ground object data BGD, the shadow image CH12 is used. Is caused to follow the effect character CH11, the relationship between the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data becomes complicated. On the other hand, the position of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed corresponding to the change of the position of the character object data COD, and the plane shadow texture data is added to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD. By adopting a configuration to which BST1 and BST2 are applied, it is possible to display the shadow image CH12 without causing such inconvenience.

  In the configuration in which object data is provided separately from the ground object data BGD in order to display the shadow image CH12, the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is a planar shadow plate-like object data configured in a flat shape with no wall thickness. BSD. As a result, it is possible to suppress the data capacity necessary for storing image data in the memory module 133 in advance.

  The planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is arranged at a position spaced one pixel above the ground object data BGD. As a result, the shadow image CH12 can be displayed without being buried in the ground image BG.

  In the configuration in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed in accordance with the change in the display mode of the effect character CH11, a plurality of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided and used corresponding to the display mode of the effect character CH11. The target plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are changed. As a result, it is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 while reducing the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to plane shadow display>
In the above embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed in accordance with the change of the display mode of the effect character CH11 by changing the type of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 applied to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the type of the plane shadow texture data BST3 applied to the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is changed. Instead, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU 131 in this embodiment.

  If it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3301: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3302). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, and plane shadow texture data BST3. After that, in step S3303, plane shadow display start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or if the process of step S3303 is executed, in step S3304, the ground object data BGD and the ground use data are used as current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. Grasping texture data BGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3305). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3306, based on the currently set execution target table, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data COD and CTD. (Step S3307). In this case, the character for presentation CH11 is displayed as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 70 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 70 (b). The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S3308, based on the currently set execution target table, the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is grasped as the current target data. In a succeeding step S3309, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. In the first shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is set so that the shape of the shadow image CH12 becomes the first shape mode corresponding to the first display mode of the effect character CH11. This is a period in which the first shape data is used as the shape data to be applied. In the second shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70B, the shape of the shadow image CH12 corresponds to the second display mode of the effect character CH11. This is a period in which the second shape data is used as the shape data applied to the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD so as to be in the two shape mode. When it is the first shadow display period (step S3309: YES), the first shape data is grasped at step S3310, and when it is the second shadow display period (step S3309: NO), the second shape data is obtained at step S3311. To figure out. The shape data grasped in step S3310 or step S3311 is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST3.

  When the process of step S3310 is executed or when the process of step S3311 is executed, in step S3312, the plane shadow texture data BST3 is grasped as the current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. . Thereafter, in step S3313, parameter information other than the shape data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is calculated and derived for the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST3, and the derived parameter information is obtained. Is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data BSD and BST3. After that, in step S3314, plane display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  According to the above-described another form, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD, instead of changing the type of the plane shadow texture data BST3. It is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 according to the display mode of the effect character CH11 while suppressing the data capacity required to store the plane shadow texture data BST3 in advance.

<Further another form of configuration related to plane shadow display>
In the configuration in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, the first display mode is used as the display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed to move. In addition to the second display mode, a display mode corresponding to the operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. According to such a configuration, the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed as the effect character CH11. It becomes possible to associate with an aspect in detail. On the other hand, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and the predetermined second The second plane shadow texture data BST2 may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group corresponding to the operation period. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 in advance.

  In the configuration in which the shape data of the plane shadow plate-like object data BSD is provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, the display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed to move is the first display mode. In addition to the first display mode and the second display mode, there may be a configuration in which a display mode corresponding to an operation path between these display modes exists. In this case, the shape data of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD may be set to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis, whereby the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is changed to the display of the effect character CH11. It becomes possible to associate with an aspect in detail. On the other hand, the first shape data is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and corresponds to the predetermined second operation period. It is good also as a structure which makes 2nd shape data use object with respect to each display mode (a 2nd display mode is included) included in the 2nd display mode group. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the shape data in advance.

  The object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and is configured in a thick three-dimensional shape like the character object data COD. Object data may be used.

  A structure in which the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 is displayed using object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD, and a reflection image showing a state in which the effect character CH11 is reflected on the water surface is displayed. May be used to

<Configuration for displaying step shadow>
Next, a configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 72A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the step shadow display, and FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the step shadow display. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the stepped shadow display is a moving image in which an effect character CH13 that is recognized by a player when a person with a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet is represented moves using stairs. This is the display content for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 on the staircase image SG representing the staircase in the situation where the display is being performed. In this case, the shadow image CH14 is displayed along the staircase shape. Specifically, the shadow image CH14 is displayed from one tread to the step just below, and the shadow image CH14 has a stepped shape corresponding to the fact that a step due to kicking has occurred between the treads. Is displayed.

  The display content of the shadow image CH14 changes in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. Specifically, as the effect character CH13 goes up the stairs, the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on one tread changes and the type of tread that is the display target of the shadow image CH14 also changes. For example, in the situation where the shadow image CH14 is displayed in a step shape over two continuous treads and the kicking up between them, the effect character CH13 moves so as to move up the stairs. The range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the tread is gradually reduced, and the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread is gradually increased. Then, through the state where the shadow image CH14 is displayed over the upper tread and the kicking that is continuous with the tread, a part of the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread.

  As image data for displaying the effect character CH13, as shown in FIG. 72B, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance. As image data for displaying the staircase image SG, the memory module 133 stores staircase object data SGD and staircase texture data SGTD in advance. Further, as the image data for displaying the shadow image CH14, the memory module 133 stores the step shadow plate-like object data SSD and the step shadow texture data SST in advance.

  When the shadow image CH14 is displayed, the step shadow plate-like object data SSD in the world coordinate system includes character object data COD1 for displaying the effect character CH13 and staircase object data SGD for displaying the staircase image SG. It is arranged between. The step shadow plate-like object data SSD is a flat object with no wall thickness, which is formed into a step shape by matching the shape of the stairs, and is a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. Compared with the object data, the number of polygons per unit display surface is small. The step shadow plate-like object data SSD is set to a size smaller than the staircase object data SGD, and corresponds to a part of the staircase portion displayed by the staircase image SG in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed. Is set. Then, the shadow image CH14 is displayed by applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD.

  The step shadow plate-like object data SSD is arranged at a position spaced upward by a predetermined distance (specifically, one pixel) from the staircase object data SGD in the world coordinate system. Character object data COD1 is arranged above the object data SSD. Thus, by arranging the step shadow plate-like object data SSD at a position spaced upward from the staircase object data SGD, the shadow image CH14 is reliably displayed above the staircase image SG.

  Only one type of step shadow texture data SST is set. When the shadow image CH14 is moved in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13, the position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is adjusted according to the movement of the effect character CH13. Change. Specifically, when the predetermined color information of the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, base UV coordinate data corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the color information is set. In the configuration in which the color information is applied to the pixels of the stepped shadow plate-like object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data of the stepped shadow plate-like object data SSD is changed in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. The position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD changes. For example, step shadow texture data whose UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1) for pixels of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1). In the configuration in which the color information of SST is applied, the texture for the step shadow with respect to the plate object data for step shadow SSD is changed by changing the pixel whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1). The position to which the data SST is applied changes. Note that the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD can be changed by the display CPU 131, but the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the step shadow texture data SST, and therefore changed by the display CPU 131. I can't.

  As data for changing the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD at each update timing of the image, the memory module 133 stores UV coordinate animation data UAD in advance as shown in FIG. 72 (b). Has been. In the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinates of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD are associated one by one with the respective update timings of the period in which the effect character CH13 is displayed as a moving image on the stairs. Data for changing data is set. The data to be changed refers to the base UV coordinate data so that the base UV coordinate data set for each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction. It is data of the value to be added. By using the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinate data of each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction at each update timing. Then, by applying the step shadow texture data SST using constant UV coordinate data at each update timing, the shadow image CH14 is moved and displayed while being shifted by the same amount in a fixed direction at each update timing. Become.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying a step shadow performed by the display CPU 131. The step shadow display calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the step shadow display is activated when information on the step shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

  If it is the start timing of the step shadow display (step S3401: YES), the UV coordinate animation data UAD is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S3402). Further, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the step shadow display is grasped (step S3403). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST. In step S3404, step shadow display start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the step shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or if the process of step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, staircase object data SGD and staircase data are used as current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. Grasp the texture data SGTD. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the stair object data SGD and stair texture data SGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data SGD and SGTD. (Step S3406). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is updated so that the staircase image SG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

  In step S3407, based on the currently set execution target table, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as data to be used this time. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data COD1 and CTD1. (Step S3408). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is updated so that the animation of the effect character CH13 going up the stairs is displayed (see FIG. 72A).

  Thereafter, in step S3409, the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is grasped as the current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. In the subsequent step S3410, the incremented data of the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing is read from the UV coordinate animation data UAD already read in the work RAM 132, and the read data is converted into the current base UV coordinate data. By adding, base UV coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing is derived. Then, the derived base UV coordinate data is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the step shadow plate-like object data SSD.

  Thereafter, in step S3411, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as the current use target data based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3412, parameter information other than the base UV coordinate data in the step shadow plate-like object data SSD and parameter information of the step shadow texture data SST are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is displayed in the work RAM 132 by these images. Data is written in an area secured corresponding to the data SSD, SST. Thereafter, in step S3413, step shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the step shadow display is being executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  In this case, the character object data grasped in step S3408 so that the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD. Coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of COD1 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the staircase data grasped in step S3406 so that the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the staircase image SG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

  When the calculation process for step shadow display is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, Information on instruction to use staircase object data SGD, staircase texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and step shadow display start designation information is set at the step shadow display start timing.

  Next, step shadow display setting processing executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The step shadow display setting process is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, a step shadow display setting process is executed.

  If step start display information is set in the current drawing list (step S3501: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target from the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasp result, the various image data is read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3502). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or if the process of step S3502 is executed, in step S3503, the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. . In step S3504, the parameter information of the data SGD and SGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S3505, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3506, the parameter information of the data COD1, CTD1 is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is displayed so that the appearance of the effect character CH13 going up the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A). To grasp.

  Thereafter, in step S3507, the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3508, the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is grasped based on the current drawing list, and in step S3509, other parameter information applied to the data SSD is grasped. In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD for displaying the shadow image CH14 under the effect character CH13 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the staircase grasped in step S3504 so that the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is arranged at a position separated by one pixel on the side away from the staircase image SG. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

  Thereafter, in step S3510, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as display target data based on the current drawing list. In step S3511, the fixed UV coordinate data of the step shadow texture data SST is grasped from the texture data SST. In step S3512, other parameter information to be applied to the texture data SST is displayed in the current drawing list. Based on

  Thereafter, in step S3513, a setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasp results in steps S3503 to S3512.

  By executing the setting process for the step shadow display as described above, the staircase object data SGD, the character object data COD1, and the step shadow plate-like object data SSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 is displayed. Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation in (1) is applied to each object data SGD, COD1, SSD. Corresponding texture data SGTD, CTD1, and SST are applied to each object data SGD, COD1, and SSD. Thereby, on the display surface P, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), a moving image display in which the effect character CH13 is moving on the stairs of the staircase image SG is performed, and in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. Then, the moving image display is performed such that the shadow image CH14 follows the shape of the staircase while deforming.

  In the configuration in which the effect character CH13 is displayed so as to move on the stairs as described above, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-like object data SSD formed in accordance with the shape of the stairs. The shadow image CH14 is displayed. Thereby, the shadow image CH14 can be displayed along the shape of the stairs.

  The step shadow plate-like object data SSD is set corresponding to the entire range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed on the stairs, and the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is changed to change the shadow image CH14. By adopting a configuration in which the display position is changed, a data capacity necessary for storing image data can be increased compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of step shadow plate-like object data corresponding to each display position of the shadow image CH14 is prepared. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Instead of applying the step shadow texture data SST to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied by separately setting the step shadow plate-like object data SSD, thereby providing the base UV coordinate data. It is possible to prevent the display position of the staircase texture data SGTD from being affected when the display position of the shadow image CH14 is changed.

<Another configuration of the step shadow display>
A configuration for changing the display position of the image by changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data without changing the UV coordinate data of the texture is used to display the planar shadow image CH12 already described. Also good. In this case, the size of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is not made to correspond to the entire ground object data BGD, but to correspond to a partial range in which the shadow image CH12 can be displayed in the ground object data BGD. As a result, the data capacity of the planar shadow plate-like object data BSD can be reduced.

  When the texture UV coordinate data can be changed by the display CPU 131, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the staircase object data SGD without using the step shadow plate-like object data SSD. It is good. In this case, after the staircase texture data SGTD is applied to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the position corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the display CPU 131. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in that the step shadow plate-like object data SSD is not necessary, and the relationship with the UV coordinate data without changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data. Thus, it is possible to perform movement display along the staircase shape of the shadow image CH14.

  The object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD for displaying the shadow image CH14 is not limited to the plate-like object data, and is configured in a solid three-dimensional shape like the character object data COD1. Object data may be used.

  A structure in which the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 is displayed using object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD, and a reflection image showing the effect character CH13 reflecting off the water surface is displayed. May be used to

<Configuration for performing variable display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a variable display effect will be described. FIG. 75A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the variable display effect, and FIG. 75B is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the area used in the execution of the variable display effect in the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. It is explanatory drawing of.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the variable display effect is in front of the effect character CH15 that is recognized by the player when a person having a face, torso, both hands, and both feet is expressed. This is an effect in which a plurality of symbol display parts CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed. In the variable display effect, three types of the first symbol display unit CH16, the second symbol display unit CH17, and the third symbol display unit CH18 are variably displayed. However, the number of the symbol display units may be one, There may be a plurality. Each symbol display part CH16-CH18 has the same external appearance shape, respectively, and the production | presentation symbol is attached | subjected to each of each surface arranged in the circumference direction. In the one symbol display part CH16 to CH18, the types of effect symbols arranged in the circumferential direction are all different, while the effect symbols set in each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 are the same.

  The variable display effect is executed as a promotion effect in the opening / closing execution mode. The promotion effect is an effect that can occur both in the case of the normal jackpot result and in the case of the 15R high-precision jackpot result. Specifically, at the end of the game-playing effect, the symbol display device 41 finally stops and displays the combination of even symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result, and the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is displayed. If the result is a 15R high-accuracy big hit result, a high-accuracy corresponding effect is performed during the opening / closing execution mode, and if the big hit result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a normal big hit result, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. This is an effect in which a low-accuracy response effect is performed. If the variable display effect is started during the opening / closing execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R high-accuracy large hit result, the same effect symbol is displayed when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display parts CH16 to CH18 is stopped. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the normal jackpot result, when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display parts CH16 to CH18 is stopped, the combination of the same effect symbols is not stopped and displayed.

  When the variable display effect is executed, the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are displayed translucently for at least a predetermined period. In this case, each of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is displayed as a three-dimensional image using object data and texture data stored in advance in the memory module 133. If applied, the image on the back side of the object data set as the three-dimensional data may be seen as it is. On the other hand, the object data for displaying each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is not subjected to translucency processing, but two-dimensional drawing of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 created separately from the effect character CH15. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the data is subjected to a semi-transparency process and superimposed on the two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15. The translucent symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are displayed in a variable manner.

  In order to perform the display control, the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 includes a drawing buffer BF1, a first storage buffer BF2, a second storage buffer BF3, and a third storage as shown in FIG. A buffer BF4 and a fourth storage buffer BF5 are provided. In each of these buffers BF1 to BF5, the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 are set, and 1 byte is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. Therefore, drawing data similar to the drawing data drawn in the frame areas 142a and 142b can be drawn in each of the buffers BF1 to BF5. In each unit area, in addition to the RBG color area, a 1-byte area for setting an α value is set.

  The drawing buffer BF1 is used when drawing two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15 and two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The first storage buffer BF2 is used for temporarily storing the two-dimensional drawing data of the effect character CH15 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The second storage buffer BF3 is used for temporarily storing the two-dimensional drawing data of the first symbol display unit CH16 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The third storage buffer BF4 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The fourth storage buffer BF5 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 created using the drawing buffer BF1.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for variable display effects executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the variable display effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for the variable display effect is activated when information on the variable display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

  When it is the start timing of the variable display effect (step S3601: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the variable display effect is grasped (step S3602). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, and second data. Symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display portion CH17, and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 are included. After that, in step S3603, the start designation information of the variable display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the variable display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3601 or when the process of step S3603 is executed, in order to display the effect character CH15 as the current use target data based on the currently set execution target table in step S3604. The character object data and the character texture data are grasped. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data and character texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 132 (step S3605). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data is updated so that the display content is recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

  Further, in step S3606, the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. To do. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for each symbol object data and each symbol texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in correspondence with the image data in the work RAM 132 (step S3607). ). In this case, in the world coordinate system of each pixel of each symbol object data, each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 has a display content that is recognized as rotating around in a predetermined direction before the effect character CH15. Coordinate data is updated. In addition, the α value applied to each symbol object data in the entire period of the variable display effect is set to opaque information that does not transmit images that overlap on the back side of the display surface P.

  Thereafter, in step S3608, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not it is a translucent period for displaying the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 in a translucent state. If it is a semi-transparent period (step S3608: YES), in step S3609, semi-transparent value data is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. In step S3610, the translucent designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is a translucent period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3608, or if the process of step S3610 is executed, in step S3611, the display CPU 131 displays variable display effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the variable display effect. Store in register.

  When the calculation process for the variable display effect is executed as described above, the character object for displaying the effect character CH15 is displayed in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). Data and character texture data, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the second symbol display unit CH17 And information on the instruction to use the symbol object data and the symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display part CH18. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and the variable display effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the variable display effect, and semi-transparency designation information is set in the semi-transparent period. The Furthermore, when translucent designation information is set, translucent value data is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the setting process for the variable display effect executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the variable display effect is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the variable display effect is executed.

  When the start designation information of the variable display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3701: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target from the address information set in the drawing list. The address where the various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasp result, the various image data is read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3702). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, and second data. Symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display portion CH17, and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 are included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3702 is executed, character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15 based on the current drawing list are obtained in step S3703. It is grasped as data to be displayed. In step S3704, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including coordinate data for displaying content that is recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

  Thereafter, in step S3705, the symbol object data and the symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are grasped based on the current drawing list. In step S3706, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various symbol information is grasped including the coordinate data for displaying contents that are recognized that the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are circling in a predetermined direction before the effect character CH15. Further, as the α value to be applied to each symbol object data, opaque information that does not transmit an image that overlaps on the back side of the display surface P is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S3707, a setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasp results in steps S3703 to S3706. As a result, in the world coordinate system, the object data of the effect character CH15, the first symbol, in a positional relationship that enables creation of drawing data corresponding to the image for variable display effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). The object data of the display unit CH16, the object data of the second symbol display unit CH17, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 are set. That is, the object data of each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 is arranged in front of the object data of the effect character CH15, the object data of the first symbol display part CH16 is arranged on the left, and the second symbol display part is arranged in the center. The object data of CH17 is arranged, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 is arranged on the right.

  Next, drawing data creation processing for variable display effects executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for the variable display effect is a drawing data creation process for the effect and design executed in step S2311 of the drawing process (FIG. 44) when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list. It is executed as part of the process.

  In the following description, the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 79A to 79C and FIGS. 80A to 80E are referred to as appropriate. FIG. 79A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the first symbol display unit CH16 stored in the second storage buffer BF3, and FIG. 79B is stored in the third storage buffer BF4. FIG. 79C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17. FIG. 79C is a diagram for explaining the drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5. It is explanatory drawing. FIGS. 80A to 80E are diagrams for explaining how the drawing data of the variable display effect image is created using the drawing data stored in the storage buffers BF2 to BF5. FIG.

  First, in step S3801, initialization processing of the drawing buffer BF1 of the development buffer 141 is executed. In the initialization process, each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to “0” in each unit area, and “0” is cleared so that 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to completely transparent in each unit area. Is done.

  In a succeeding step S3802, a drawing process of the effect character is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the effect character CH15 in the world coordinate system. Then, the projected drawing data is written into the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is rendered is set to data corresponding to opaqueness, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not rendered is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency. Thereafter, in step S3803, storage processing in the first storage buffer BF2 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3802 is stored as it is in the first storage buffer BF2.

  In the subsequent step S3804, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to “0” in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to completely transparent in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

  Thereafter, in step S3805, the drawing process of the first symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the first symbol display unit CH16 in the world coordinate system. Then, the projected drawing data is written into the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (a-1), the display target data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16 is stored in the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the first symbol display unit CH16. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79 (a-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, in step S3806, storage processing in the second storage buffer BF3 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3805 is stored as it is in the second storage buffer BF3.

  In the subsequent step S3807, the rendering buffer BF1 is initialized as in step S3801. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to “0” in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to completely transparent in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

  Thereafter, in step S3808, a drawing process of the second symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the second symbol display unit CH17 in the world coordinate system. Then, the projected drawing data is written into the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (b-1), the display target data for displaying the second symbol display unit CH17 is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the second symbol display unit CH17. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opaqueness as shown in FIG. 79 (b-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, in step S3809, storage processing in the third storage buffer BF4 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3808 is stored in the third storage buffer BF4 as it is.

  In the subsequent step S3810, initialization processing for the drawing buffer BF1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB is cleared to “0” in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to completely transparent in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

  Thereafter, in step S3811, a drawing process of the third symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking other than the object data corresponding to the third symbol display unit CH18 in the world coordinate system. Then, the projected drawing data is written into the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (c-1), the display target data for displaying the third symbol display unit CH18 is stored in the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the third symbol display unit CH18. Written in the unit area. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opaqueness as shown in FIG. 79 (c-2), and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to complete transparency is maintained. Thereafter, in step S3812, storage processing in the fourth storage buffer BF5 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3811 is stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5 as it is.

  In the subsequent step S3813, the drawing data stored in the first storage buffer BF2 is written in the effect and design buffer in the screen buffer 144. In this case, display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the effect and symbol buffer corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is rendered is set to data corresponding to opaqueness, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not rendered is maintained as data corresponding to complete transparency.

  Thereafter, in step S3814, it is determined whether translucent designation information is set in the current drawing list. If translucent designation information is set, translucent value data is read from the current drawing list in step S3815.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3814 or if the process of step S3815 is executed, the rendering data stored in the second to fourth storage buffers BF3 to BF5 is displayed in the screen buffer 144 in step S3816. And write to the design buffer. In this case, the display target data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 corresponding to each of the drawing data is the buffer for the effect and symbol corresponding to each final display position of each symbol display portion CH16 to CH18. Is written in the unit area.

  Here, when the process of step S3815 is not executed, an opaque α value is set for the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and other than the corresponding display target data, it is completely set. A transparent α value is set. Therefore, the display target data of each symbol display part CH16-CH18 produces effects about the part which overlaps with the display target data of each symbol display part CH16-CH18 among the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 already written. The display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is maintained as it is for the portion that is overwritten on the display target data of the character CH15 and does not overlap the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. In addition, in the display target data of each symbol display part CH16 to CH18, the display target data of each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 is added with an opaque α value for a portion that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. Set by. In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffer, a unit area where neither the display target data of the effect character CH15 nor the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is written is set to a completely transparent α value. It becomes a state.

On the other hand, when the processing in step S3815 is executed, a translucent α value (for example, “0.5”) is set in the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and In addition to the display target data to be displayed, a completely transparent α value is set. Therefore, of the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 already written, the former display target data and the latter display target data are used for the portions overlapping the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The blending process using the translucent α value is executed. For example, the color information of the former display target data in a predetermined unit area is “r10, g10, b10”, the color information of the latter display target data is “r20, g20, b20”, and a semi-transparent α value is set. When “α20” is assumed,
R: r10 × (1−α20) + r20 × α20
G: g10 × (1−α20) + g20 × α20
B: b10 × (1−α20) + b20 × α20
It becomes.

  Moreover, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 for the portion of the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 that has already been written does not overlap with the display target data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. Is maintained as it is. In addition, in the display target data of each symbol display part CH16 to CH18, the display object data of each symbol display part CH16 to CH18 is added with the above-mentioned semi-transparent α value for the part that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. It is set in the state. In each unit area of the production and design buffer, a unit area where neither the display target data of the production character CH15 nor the display target data of the design display portions CH16 to CH18 is written has a completely transparent α value. It becomes a state.

  As the drawing data creation process is executed, the drawing data stored in the first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5 are synthesized as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d). As shown in 80 (e), an image for a variable display effect is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) to 80 (d), display target data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is created from the object data in which the opaque α value is set, and the display is performed. In this configuration, a semi-transparent α value is set for the target data, and the effect character CH15 is superimposed on the display target data. As a result, it is possible to display the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 in a semi-transparent state while preventing the occurrence of an event that the image on the back side of the object data that should not be originally displayed is seen as it is. It becomes.

  Since the drawing buffer BF1 is also used as a buffer for individually creating drawing data for the effect character CH15 and the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18, it is necessary to change the drawing buffer BF1 as the creation destination when drawing data is created. Therefore, the process design can be facilitated.

  A configuration in which the α value of each unit area of the rendering buffer BF1 is set to “0” corresponding to complete transparency before the rendering data CH15 and the rendering data of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are created in the rendering buffer BF1. As a result, in the drawing data created in the drawing buffer BF1, the alpha value is not required for the unit areas other than the unit areas for displaying the effect character CH15 and the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. Can be set to “0” corresponding to complete transparency.

<Another form of configuration related to variable display effect>
Although the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is individually created for the drawing buffer BF1, and the display target data corresponding to each is stored in different storage buffers BF3 to BF5, the present invention is not limited to this. The display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 may be collectively created in the drawing buffer BF1, and the collectively created display target data may be stored in one storage buffer. This makes it possible to reduce the number of executions of the drawing buffer initialization process, the display target data creation process, and the display target data storage process, and the processing load can be reduced.

  -It is not limited to the structure which sets the same semi-transparency value data with respect to the drawing data separately stored in each of the second storage buffer BF3, the third storage buffer BF4, and the fourth storage buffer BF5, The translucent value data to be set may be different for each drawing data.

<Configuration for distortion background display>
Next, a configuration for performing distortion background display will be described. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the distortion background display. FIG. 82A to FIG. 82C are explanatory diagrams for explaining image data for performing a distortion background display.

  With the distortion background display, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), the background image BGG displayed so that the player recognizes that no distortion has occurred as shown in FIG. 81 (a-1). Is displayed so that the player can recognize that distortion has occurred. In this case, the distortion background display is performed so that the player can recognize that distortion has occurred in two of the X, Y, and Z axes (specifically, the X and Y axes).

  As the background image BGG, as shown in FIG. 82A, background plate-like object data GSD and background texture data GTD1 stored in advance in the memory module 133 are used. The background plate-like object data GSD is object data that is configured in a flat shape with no wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. . Then, the background texture data GTD1 is applied to the background plate-like object data GSD set in the world coordinate system to create the drawing data for the background, so that the background image BGG can be displayed. Become.

  Distorted background display is not performed by distorting the background plate-like object data GSD in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), but by adjusting the data of the background texture data GTD1. Done. Specifically, when it is assumed that the background texture data GTD1 is set as color information as shown in FIG. 81 (b-1), a predetermined column as shown in FIG. 81 (b-2). By adjusting the color information so that the horizontal width of the color information is widened, the background image BGG is displayed so that the game ball recognizes that distortion has occurred as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2). In this way, the background plate-like object data GSD that is three-dimensional data is not distorted, but the distorted background display is performed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 that is two-dimensional data. The data to be adjusted when the distortion background display is performed can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

  The color information adjustment mode of the background texture data GTD1 for displaying the distorted background is set to texture data provided separately from the background texture data GTD1. As the texture data, the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG.

  These first refraction texture data GTD2 and second refraction texture data GTD3 have the same number of pixels as the background texture data GTD1, and each refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3 and the background texture data. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each pixel of GTD1. As shown in FIG. 82B, each pixel of the background texture data GTD1 is set with a 1-byte area corresponding to each RGB color in a one-to-one correspondence. The refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are also shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), a 1-byte area corresponding to each of the RGB colors one to one is set. That is, although the contents set for each pixel are different for each texture data GTD1 to GTD3, the basic data configuration is the same for the background texture data GTD1 and the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3. Yes.

  Data corresponding to each RGB color (hereinafter also referred to as R value, G value, B value) set in each pixel of each refraction texture data GTD2, GTD3 is not used as color information but is distorted. Used as degree information. Specifically, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis, the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis, and the B value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Z axis. . However, the distortion of the background image BGG is not caused for all of the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis, but is caused only for the two axes of the X axis and the Y axis as described above. Therefore, in each pixel of the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, distortion data is set for the R value and G value, but constant data is set so that all bits are “0”. Has been.

  The first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 have the R value and G value of each pixel set so that the color information adjustment mode of the background texture data GTD1 is different. Specifically, the first refraction texture data GTD2 indicates that, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), in the background image BGG, the horizontal center side is recessed rearward, and the left and right sides swell forward. The second refraction texture data GTD3 is swelled forward in the horizontal direction in the background image BGG, and the left and right sides are backward in the background image BGG. An adjustment mode of color information is set so that the player can recognize that it is recessed. With this configuration, the background image BGG is constant by alternately switching between the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 as the refraction texture data to be applied to the background texture data GTD1. It is possible to perform display so that the player can recognize that the pattern is wavy back and forth.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for performing the distortion background display will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for distortion background display executed by the display CPU 131. The distortion background display calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S2206 in the task process (FIG. 42). The calculation process for distortion background display is activated when information on distortion background display is set in the currently set execution target table.

  When it is the start timing of the distorted background display (step S3901: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the distorted background display is grasped (step S3902). The image data includes background plate-like object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3. Thereafter, in step S3903, distortion start display start information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that distortion background display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or if the process of step S3903 is executed, a background plate-like object is used as the current use target data in step S3904 and step S3905 based on the currently set execution target table. Data GSD and background texture data GTD1 are grasped. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for the background plate-like object data GSD and background texture data GTD1, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the image data GSD and GTD1. (Step S3906). In this case, the shape data in the world coordinate system of the background plate-like object data GSD (that is, the relative position between the pixels) is constant during the period in which the distorted background display is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first distortion display period based on the currently set execution target table. The first distortion display period is a period in which the first refraction texture data GTD2 is used as the refraction texture data, and the second distortion display period is a period in which the second refraction texture data GTD3 is used as the refraction texture data. If it is the first distortion display period (step S3907: YES), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is grasped in step S3908. If it is the second distortion display period (step S3907: NO), the first distortion display period is determined in step S3909. The birefringence texture data GTD3 is grasped. When the process of step S3908 or step S3909 is executed, in step S3910, the distortion background display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the distortion background display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

  When the distortion background display calculation processing is executed as described above, the drawing list output processing (step S609) in the subsequent drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 includes the background plate-like object data GSD and the background texture data. Information on the use instruction of GTD1 is set, and information on the use instruction on the side to be used this time among the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, distortion background display designation information is set in the drawing list, and further, distortion background display start designation information is set at a distortion background display start timing.

  Next, the setting process for distortion background display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The distortion background display setting process is executed as a part of the background setting process executed in step S2302 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). In addition, when distortion background display designation information is set in the drawing list, a setting process for distortion background display is executed.

  When the start designation information for distortion background display is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the memory module 133 is the current display target based on the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasp result, the various image data is read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4002). The image data includes background plate-like object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process of step S4002 is executed, in step S4003 and step S4004, the background plate-like object data GTD1 and background texture data GTD1 are displayed based on the current drawing list. As data. In step S4005, based on the current drawing list, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 corresponding to the current distortion display period are grasped as display target data. Thereafter, in step S4006, the parameter information of the various image data is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S4007, a refraction application process for applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, which are the current use targets, to the background texture data GTD1 is executed.

  In the refraction application process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, first, the background texture data GTD1 is separately stored in the background storage area 141a provided in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4101). As a result, in a situation where the background texture data GTD1 has already been read out in the expansion buffer GTD1, the same data as the background texture data GTD1 is stored and held in the background separate storage area 141a. In the following description, the background texture data GTD1 read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be drawn, and the background written in the background storage area 141a. The texture data GTD1 for background is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be stored separately. Thereafter, in step S4102, the application counter provided in the register 153 of the VDP 135 is set to the same number as the total number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1.

  In the subsequent step S4103, the R value and the G value are extracted from one pixel corresponding to the current application counter in the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used this time. In step S4104, a refraction calculation process using the extracted R value and G value is executed.

  In the refraction calculation process, when the pixel corresponding to the value of the current application counter in the background texture data GTD1 is set as the reference pixel, the number of continuous pixels from the reference pixel is determined as a blend process execution target. The R data extracted in step S4103 is the data to be attached and the data for determining how to perform the blending process for each pixel subjected to the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel. It is calculated from a predetermined arithmetic expression using the value and the G value. In this case, the pixels to be subjected to the blending process are limited to pixels arranged on one axis with respect to the reference pixel (specifically, the X axis in FIG. 81A), and on the other one axis (specifically Does not include pixels arranged on the Z axis in FIG. The refraction calculation process is performed by a refraction calculation unit 154 provided as a dedicated circuit in the VDP 135. As described above, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X axis and the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis. Each of the R value and the G value is 1-byte data. Since it is a quantity, it can take a value of 0-255. The refraction calculating unit 154 derives target pixel data for specifying a pixel to be included as an execution target of the blending process based on the G value corresponding to the information on the degree of distortion to the Y axis, and information on the degree of distortion to the X axis. The weighting data for specifying the weighting of the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel is derived based on the R value corresponding to.

  After executing the refraction calculation process in step S4104, in step S4105, the pixel color information corresponding to the calculation result of the refraction calculation process in step S4104 is stored separately using the target pixel data. Are extracted from the background texture data GTD1. Then, the blend values corresponding to the weighting data are integrated with the color information of each pixel, and the sum of the respective values after the integration is calculated (step S4106). In this case, the blend process is performed individually for each RGB color of each pixel. Thereafter, the RGB values calculated in step S4106 are overwritten on the pixels corresponding to the current value of the application counter in the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn. Thus, the color information adjustment processing corresponding to the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used is executed for the pixels of the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn corresponding to the current application counter value.

  Thereafter, in step S4108, 1 is subtracted from the value of the application counter in the register 153, and it is determined whether or not the value of the application counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S4109). When the value of the application counter is 1 or more (step S4109: NO), the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 is executed for the pixel corresponding to the updated application counter value.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for displaying the distorted background, after executing the refraction applying process in step S4007, in step S4008, the setting process to the world coordinate system according to the contents corresponding to the processing results in steps S4003 to S4007. Execute.

  By executing the setting process for distorted background display as described above, background plate-like object data GSD is arranged in the world coordinate system, and various parameter information derived by calculation in the display CPU 131 is used for the background. This is applied to the plate-like object data GSD. Further, the background texture data GTD1 after the color information adjustment process is executed using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 which are the current use objects is applied to the background plate-like object data GSD. . Thereby, on the display surface P, the background image BGG is displayed so that the player can recognize that the X axis and the Y axis are distorted.

  Since the data for applying refraction is provided as texture data as described above, it is possible to produce a refraction effect on an image using the data structure of the texture data as it is. In this case, data for applying refraction is handled in the same manner as when reading other texture data in that it is not necessary to store data having a dedicated data structure for causing refraction in the memory module 133. Reading from the memory module 133 is possible. For example, in the case of a dedicated data configuration for causing refraction, the processing content for developing data in the development buffer 141 is different from that for texture data, but for applying refraction. By providing the data as texture data, it is possible to make the processing content for the development the same as in the case of normal texture data. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In a configuration in which data corresponding to each color of RGB is set in the texture data, the refraction calculation unit 154 does not use all the data but uses only the R value and the G value as a part of the background. The color information adjustment process for the texture data GTD1 is executed. As a result, the processing can be simplified as compared with the configuration using each RGB data, and the time required for the color information adjustment processing of the background texture data GTD1 can be shortened.

  Instead of distorting the background plate-like object data GSD that is three-dimensional data, the distortion is displayed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 that is two-dimensional data. Data to be adjusted when performing background display can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another Form of Configuration Related to Distorted Background Display>
Instead of using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to adjust the color information of the background texture data GTD1, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are used to adjust the pixel information of the background plate-like object data GSD. The background plate-like object data GSD may be distorted by adjusting the coordinate data, and as a result, a distorted background display may be performed.

  A period in which the background texture data GTD1 is directly rendered without applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, instead of the configuration in which the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are always applied to the background texture data GTD1. May be set before or after the distortion background display period. In this case, the player can easily recognize that the background image BGG is distorted.

  -Instead of a configuration for deriving parameter information for refracting an image using two values of R value, G value, and B value of texture data, using one value or all values The parameter information may be derived.

  Instead of a configuration for deriving parameter information for refracting an image using texture data, another parameter information such as an image transparency value may be derived using texture data.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of another embodiment described below may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) When the sound light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute an effect, the second stage effect content is instructed by a command composed of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. However, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of the execution of the second stage is instructed, and there are cases where the contents of the presentation are instructed and the execution or non-execution of the second stage is instructed. Also good.

  (2) One command composed of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in correspondence with the contents of the plurality of types of second stages included in one production. Instead of the configuration, one command including command data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of contents of the second stage included in one production may be transmitted. Specifically, a command including one command data corresponding to the contents of the first stage and each command data corresponding to the contents of each second stage may be transmitted. Even in this case, it is preferable that the contents of each second stage are distinguished in units of bytes.

  (3) One command composed of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted in correspondence with the contents of the plurality of types of second stages included in one production. In the configuration, if the first command data CD1 of each command transmitted before the end command is transmitted does not match, the display CPU 72 requests the sound-side MPU 62 to retransmit the command, and there is the re-request. In this case, the same command may be transmitted again from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. As a result, even if the command is rewritten due to electrical noise, it is possible to accurately perform the performance and notification by retransmitting the command.

  (4) One command composed of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the contents of the plurality of types of second stages included in one presentation. In the configuration, a start command may be transmitted before a plurality of types of commands corresponding to one effect are transmitted. This makes it possible for the display CPU 72 to clearly grasp whether or not the command corresponding to one effect is being transmitted.

  (5) Even during the execution of the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and the symbol calculation process in step S912 included in the task process (FIG. 19), the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) The new processing times may be started. In this case, the task processing may be restarted from the middle of the arithmetic processing interrupted in the next processing time of the V interrupt processing, or the task processing may be restarted from the beginning of the interrupted arithmetic processing. According to this configuration, it is possible to start a new processing time for the V interrupt processing at an early stage.

  (6) If the execution target table for notification is read as the execution target in the display CPU 72, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19). Even in such a case, the task process may be executed using information corresponding to the new pointer information in the execution target table, instead of resuming the process in the middle of the interruption in the next task process execution. Thereby, priority can be given to the progress of the content of notification.

  (7) In the case where a new processing time of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19) and the processing is resumed from the middle of the interruption in the next execution time of the task processing. The display CPU 72 is configured to adjust the pointer information in the control pattern table in the sound light side MPU 62 by transmitting a delay command to the sound light side MPU 62. However, the adjustment may not be performed.

  (8) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, all cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are used. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

  (9) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the design image. May be configured to be projected together, may be configured to be projected together in units of effect images and design images, or may be configured to be projected all together.

  (10) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2309) is performed, the color information may be set such that the texture is pasted only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (11) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 50, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 50. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or game balls in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152);
With
The data generating means includes information deriving means (function for executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2815 in the display CPU 131) for deriving control information (coordinate data) used for generating the generated data.
The information deriving means is
Pre-derivation setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2808 and S2809 in the display CPU 131) for setting the derivation storage means (coordinate calculation area 169) to the pre-derivation state;
Derivation execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2810 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information using the derivation storage means set in the pre-derivation state;
With
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting unit is a configuration that can be executed a plurality of times to generate the generation data at the update timing of one image,
The derivation execution unit is configured to set a plurality of types of individual images (set unit character CHG1) after the setting of the pre-derivation state is performed by the pre-derivation setting unit and before the setting of the pre-derivation state is newly performed. -CHG5) is provided with a plurality of correspondence deriving means for deriving the control information (function for executing the processing of step S2810 of the display CPU 131 when deriving coordinate data for the collection skeleton data FRD2). A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A1, it is possible to change the content of the generated data by changing the control information by generating the generated data for image display using the control information, and diversify the display mode of the image It becomes possible to do. In addition, when deriving control information, it is possible to suitably derive control information by using derivation storage means and starting derivation of control information after setting the derivation storage means to the state before derivation. It becomes possible.

  In this case, control information corresponding to a plurality of types of individual images is derived after the pre-derivation state is set for the derivation storage unit and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. Is done. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving control information, compared to a configuration in which the pre-derivation state is set for each individual image. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature A2. The pre-derivation setting means sets the pre-derivation information for the individual image from which the control information is derived after the derivation storage means is initialized in the derivation storage means after the initialization. The game machine according to Feature A1, wherein the storage means for use is set to the pre-derivation state.

  According to the feature A2, when the control information is derived, the derivation storage unit is initialized and the pre-derivation information is set, so that the control information can be appropriately derived. In this case, the control information is derived for a plurality of types of individual images after the pre-derivation state is set and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. It is possible to reduce the number of times of initialization and pre-derivation information setting, and to reduce the processing load for deriving control information.

  Feature A3. The data generation means uses one image data (collection skeleton data FRD2) to display the plurality of types of individual images from which the control information is derived collectively by the multiple correspondence deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that.

  According to the feature A3, since a plurality of types of individual images are displayed by one image data, the control information derived collectively can be applied to the one image data instead of the plurality of image data. That's fine. Therefore, it is possible to simplify processing for specifying image data to which control information is applied.

Feature A4. The data generation means, when generating generation data for displaying an image on which an individual image operates, is data set corresponding to the individual image and is used as reference data for movement (skeleton data FRD1) Skeleton data FRD2), deformation data deformed according to the reference data (skin data SKD1, collective skin data SKD2), and color data (texture data BTD1) in which color information applied to the deformation data is determined , And texture data BTD2) for aggregation can be used,
Each of the multiple types of individual images from which the control information is derived collectively by the multiple correspondence deriving means is an image that can be displayed by using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. Yes,
Any one of the features A1 to A3, wherein the reference information corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images is changed by the control information so that the operation modes of the plurality of types of individual images are changed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A4, since the moving image display of plural types of individual images is performed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the moving image display of the plural types of individual images can be realistically expressed. It becomes. In this case, since control information for changing the content of the reference data is derived for a plurality of types of individual images, the processing load is extremely large even if the configuration uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. It is possible to prevent the height from increasing.

Feature A5. The data generation means uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
The feature A4 is characterized in that a total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than a total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual images. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed simultaneously using the reference data, deformation data, and color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, it is possible to reduce the amount of data subject to control information derivation and application of the derived control information. The load can be reduced.

Feature A6. The reference data includes a plurality of unit reference data (bone data BOD1 to BOD50, ABD1 to ABD50), and the individual position corresponding to the reference data is changed by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data. It is a configuration in which the operation mode of the image is changed,
The plurality of unit reference data has a data relationship set such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relationship of the sub-unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. A gaming machine according to A5.

  According to the feature A6, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. It is possible to more realistically represent the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relationship of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. Thus, when the main individual image and the sub individual image are moved together, the position data about the main unit reference data is obtained by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It is only necessary to adjust the control information to change.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to A6, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

  According to the feature A7, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set in the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is displayed regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

  Feature A8. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image have a one-to-one correspondence, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data becomes unit reference data and the unit reference data of the sub-individual image becomes sub unit reference data.

  According to the feature A8, the association between the main individual image and the sub individual image can be performed in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature A9. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

  According to the feature A9, since at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared by the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to suppress the data capacity necessary for storing various data.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features A1 to A9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152);
With
The data generation means, when generating generation data for displaying an image in which an individual image operates, is data set in correspondence with the individual image and is used as a reference data (set skeleton for assembly) Data FRD2), deformation data that deforms in accordance with the reference data (collection skin data SKD2), and color data that defines color information to be applied to the deformation data (collection texture data BTD2). Possible configuration,
The reference data includes a plurality of unit reference data (bone data ABD1 to ABD50), and an operation mode of an individual image corresponding to the reference data by changing a relative positional relationship between the plurality of unit reference data. Is a configuration to be changed,
The plurality of unit reference data has a data relationship set such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
The unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual images (second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5) among the plurality of types of individual images is the same as the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image (first set unit character CHG1). The gaming machine is set in the relationship of the sub-unit reference data.

  According to the feature B1, since the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. It is possible to more realistically represent the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relationship of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. Thus, when the main individual image and the sub individual image are moved together, the position data about the main unit reference data is obtained by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It is only necessary to adjust the control information to change.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

  According to the feature B2, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set in the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is displayed regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

  Feature B3. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image have a one-to-one correspondence, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data becomes unit reference data and the unit reference data of the sub-individual image becomes sub unit reference data.

  According to the feature B3, the association between the main individual image and the sub individual image can be performed in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature B4. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

  According to the feature B4, since at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to suppress the data capacity necessary for storing various data.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is included in one reference data.

  According to the feature B5, the unit reference data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of individual images are aggregated into one reference data, so that the processing load is reduced with respect to the process for reading the reference data and the process using the reference data. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B6. The data generation means uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
The total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

  According to the feature B6, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed simultaneously using the reference data, deformation data, and color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, the amount of data targeted for derivation of information for controlling the reference data and application of the derived information is suppressed. And the processing load can be reduced.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features B1 to B6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Arranging means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135) The function of executing the process of step S2306 in FIG. 2) and projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Generation data for storing generation data generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151, and rendering section 152) having drawing setting means (function to execute the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in VDP 135) Memory means (frame A buffer 142),
Display control means (VDP135) for causing the display means (symbol display device 41) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The arrangement means converts the corresponding image (shadow image CH12, CH14), which is one of the shadow image and reflection image of the first individual image (effect characters CH11, CH13), into the second individual image (ground image BG, staircase image). SG), the corresponding object data (planar shadow plate-like object data BSD, step shadow plate-like object data SSD), which is object data for displaying the corresponding image, is displayed. Is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from object data (ground object data BGD, staircase object data SGD) for displaying the second individual image.

  According to the feature C1, since the corresponding object data that is object data for displaying the corresponding image is set separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image, the second individual image is displayed. Independent of the data setting, data setting for displaying the corresponding image can be performed. Thus, even when the corresponding image that is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the second individual image, the display contents of the corresponding image It is possible to set data for displaying the second individual image irrespectively, and the design for displaying these images can be facilitated. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the corresponding object data is a plate-shaped polygon.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above while suppressing an increase in data capacity necessary for storing object data.

  Feature C3. The feature C1 or C2 is characterized in that the arranging means arranges the corresponding object data so as to be separated from the object data for displaying the second individual image on the side where the display position is closer to the front. Game machines.

  According to the feature C3, the corresponding object data is not arranged so as to overlap the object data for displaying the second individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space, but is arranged apart from the display position on the near side. Therefore, it is possible to display the corresponding image so as to overlap the second individual image while using the configuration in which the image to be displayed is determined in relation to the arrangement position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

  Feature C4. The data generation means changes the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space in accordance with the change of the position of the object data for displaying the first individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising (a function of executing the processing of step S3112 and step S3313 in the display CPU 131).

  According to the feature C4, the corresponding image can be moved and displayed following the moving display of the first individual image only by changing the display position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Feature C5. The data generation means includes texture setting means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135) for setting texture data for the object data.
When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the texture setting unit uses the first corresponding texture data (first plane shadow texture data BST1) as texture data for displaying the corresponding image. When the corresponding object data is set and the display mode of the second individual image is the second display mode, the second corresponding texture data (second plane shadow texture data BST2) is used as the texture data for displaying the corresponding image. ) Is set in the corresponding object data, The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

  According to the feature C5, the display mode of the corresponding image can be matched with the display mode of the first individual image only by switching the texture data set in the corresponding object data.

  Feature C6. When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the data generation means uses the first shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data, and displays the first individual image. When the mode is the second display mode, there is provided means for using the second shape data as the shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data (a function for executing the processing of steps S3309 to S3311 in the display CPU 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein:

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image by changing the shape data used for the corresponding object data.

Feature C7. The data generation means includes texture setting means (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135) for setting texture data for the object data.
The texture setting means, when the display position of the first individual image is changed, the correspondence of the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, further comprising setting position changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3410 in the display CPU 131) for changing the setting position relationship with respect to the object data.

  According to the feature C7, the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by causing the corresponding image to follow the moving display of the first individual image by changing the set positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data. Even in a situation where this is not desirable, it is possible to perform moving display of the corresponding image.

  Feature C8. The shape data of the corresponding object data is set in correspondence with the shape data of the object data for displaying the second individual image corresponding to the area where the corresponding image is displayed in the second individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein:

  According to the feature C8, since the corresponding object data is set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the second individual image, the corresponding image is displayed using the corresponding object data. It is possible to suitably superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image.

  Further, by applying the configuration limited to the feature C7 in the configuration of the feature C8, the movement display of the corresponding image is performed by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data, and the second individual image The corresponding image can be moved and displayed without complicatedly moving the corresponding object data set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the image in the virtual three-dimensional space.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data (base moving image data BMD) used for reproducing moving images,
The display control means includes
Expansion means for expanding the moving image data in the expansion area (development buffer 81) and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data (the processing of step S1303 in the VDP 76). A function to be executed, a video decoder 93);
By using still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the developing means in the order determined in the moving image data, a moving image corresponding image (color change effect character CH1 corresponding to the moving image data) is used. ) Are displayed (function for executing the process of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, function for executing the process of step S1306 in the VDP 76),
The additional image data (first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3) is read from the display storage means, and the additional image data is used when the still image data is used, thereby corresponding to the additional image data. An additional execution means for adding an additional individual image (color change target region CR) to the moving image-corresponding image (a function for executing the process of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, a function for executing the process of step S1307 in the VDP 76);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when displaying an image at one update timing, not only the still image data obtained by expanding the moving image data but also the additional image data can be used. In this configuration, an additional individual image is additionally displayed with respect to the image. Thus, for example, even when it is necessary to change a part of the moving image-compatible image, the moving image data can be used as it is by using the additional image data to cope with the change of the part. It becomes possible. In addition, for example, even when a plurality of types of moving images with different contents of a moving image-compatible image are required, moving image data can be changed by using additional image data to change the contents of some of the moving image data. There is no need to prepare multiple types. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the additional image data different at a plurality of update timings can be used so that the additional individual image can be changed at a plurality of update timings.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to change the content of the additional individual image in accordance with the content of the moving image corresponding image by using a configuration in which different additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the additional image data corresponding to each of the still image data corresponding to the plurality of update timings can be used.

  According to the feature D3, it is possible to display an additional individual image corresponding to the content of the moving image corresponding image over the entire display period of the moving image corresponding image.

  Feature D4. The gaming machine according to the feature D2 or D3, wherein the additional image data corresponding to a plurality of update timings is stored in advance in the display storage means without being compressed as moving image data.

  According to the feature D4, since the additional image data is stored as the moving image data without being compressed, when the additional individual image is additionally displayed on the moving image corresponding image, a plurality of types of moving image data development processing are performed simultaneously. There is no need to do it.

  Feature D5. The game machine according to Feature D4, wherein the additional image data is set to data having a transparency value corresponding to translucency or transparency.

  According to the feature D5, since transparent value data corresponding to semi-transparency or transparency is set in the additional image data, it is possible to perform display using the transparent value when the additional individual image is additionally displayed. For example, it is possible to display an effect image as an additional individual image, and it is also possible to display an image whose predetermined portion is transparent or translucent as an additional individual image. In addition, the additional image data having the configuration of the feature D4 and set with the transparency value data corresponding to the semi-transparency or transparency is stored without being compressed as the moving image data, so that the image quality of the additional individual image is improved. It is possible to prevent deterioration.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the additional individual image corresponds to a partial image portion of the moving image corresponding image.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to change the content of a part of the image portion of the moving image corresponding image using the additional individual image.

  Feature D7. The display control means executes color information changing means for changing color information applied to the additional image data (a function for executing the process of step S1204 in the display CPU 72, and the processes of steps S1305 and S1403 to S1406 in the VDP 76). The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the feature D7, since the color information applied to the additional image data is changed, the image data is stored compared to the configuration in which the additional image data is provided corresponding to each of a plurality of types of color information. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the storage.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
By setting the image data in a setting storage means (frame buffer 82) having a plurality of unit setting areas (unit areas 121), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the output to the display means,
With
The display control means includes
In the case where a plurality of individual images (effect effect character CH2 and effect image EG2) are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit. For the setting area data, the near side image data that is the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image (effect effect character CH2) is the near side image that is the image data of the overlapping portion of the near side individual image (effect image EG2). Duplicate reflection means (function to execute the processing of step S1701, step S1709 and step S1710 in the VDP 76) to be reflected on the data;
Reflection reduction means (in VDP 76 for reducing the reflection ratio of at least one of the near-side image data and the back-side image data when the back-side image data is reflected on the near-side image data by the overlapping reflection means. The function of executing the processing of steps S1705 to S1708),
With
The reflection reducing means reduces the reflection amount of one of the near side image data and the back side image data when reducing the reflection ratio of one of the reduction target image data of the near side image data and the back side image data. A gaming machine characterized in that the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio varies according to the content of reference image data.

  According to the feature E1, the near-side image data and the back-side image data are reflected in a duplicated manner in a state where the ratio of reflecting the reduction target image data is reduced. As a result, for example, when the near side image data and the back side image data are directly reflected and reflected, the display ratio of at least one of the image data is reduced to reduce the reflection ratio of at least one of the image data. The display can be performed satisfactorily.

  In this case, the reduction amount of the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is made different according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data. This makes it possible to reduce the reduction target image data in a manner corresponding to the content of the reduction amount reference image data, as compared with the configuration in which the reduction ratio of the reduction target image data is uniformly reduced, and the image data can be reflected in duplicate. In the case of performing, it is possible to make fine adjustments for enhancing the display effect.

  As described above, display control can be suitably performed.

  In addition, as a configuration of the overlapping reflection unit, specifically, “the image data includes a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information that defines color information. Includes a calculation processing execution unit that executes predetermined calculation processing using numerical information of unit image data that overlap each other in the plurality of individual images, and data of calculation results of the calculation processing are stored in the setting memory And a setting processing execution means for setting the unit setting area corresponding to the unit image data that overlap each other in the unit, and a more specific configuration is “the unit setting area is The numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit numerical value, and the display control means is configured so that a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed at a dot corresponding to a fixed region, and the arithmetic processing execution unit overlaps the plurality of individual images as the predetermined arithmetic processing. A configuration in which “addition processing for adding numerical information of each unit image data is performed” is given.

Feature E2. The image data includes a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
The display control means is configured to output the image signal so that a brighter color is displayed in the dots of the display unit corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information.
The reflection reducing means reduces the numerical information in which the numerical information is relatively smaller in the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data in the reduction amount reference image data in which the numerical information is relatively large. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio is made larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the amount reference image data.

  According to the feature E2, since the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which large numerical value information is set is displayed, a brighter color is displayed, so that the display control of the dot is not complicated. In this case, the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data having relatively large numerical information is the unit image of the reduction amount reference image data having relatively small numerical information. The reduction amount of the reflection ratio is larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the data. As a result, if the image data of each individual image is reflected and reflected, the amount of reduction of the reflection rate is increased by giving priority to not reaching the limit value for the part that may reach the limit value of the unit setting area. For the portion where the limit value is not likely to be reached, it is possible to reduce the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio by giving priority to overlapping the contents of the image data of each individual image.

Feature E3. The image data includes a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The reflection reduction means reduces the reflection rate of the reduction target image data by the reduction amount of the reflection rate according to each numerical value information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data. The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

  According to the feature E3, since it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the reflection ratio in units of unit image data, it is possible to finely adjust the location where priority is given to reduction of the reflection rate and the location where priority is given to overlapping reflection. It becomes possible.

Feature E4. The unit setting area is configured to be able to set numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
The image data includes a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within a range up to the limit numerical value,
The reflection reduction means sets the value obtained by dividing the value obtained by subtracting the color information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data from the limit value, by the unit image data. Any one of the characteristics E1 to E3, wherein a reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is reduced by integrating the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area. Game machines.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio according to the content of the reduced amount reference image data by using each image data itself that is the target of the overlapping reflection. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the data capacity for storing various data in advance.

  Feature E5. The reduction target image data whose reflection ratio is reduced using the reduction amount reference image data is image data on a different side from the reduction target image data among the near side image data and the back side image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein:

  According to the feature E5, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio of the image data in accordance with the contents of the image data on the other side of the overlapping reflection.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the reduction amount reference image data is the front side image data, and the reduction target image data is the back side image data.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to reflect the back side image data in a manner corresponding to the content of the front side individual image, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the back side image data is uniformly reduced, and duplication of the image data. In the case of reflection, it is possible to make fine adjustments to enhance the display effect.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Arranging means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135) The function of executing the process of step S2306 in FIG. 2) and projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the projection data projected onto the projection plane A drawing setting means (function to execute the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135), and a data storage means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152) that stores the generated data generated Data storage means (F And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display unit (display surface P) of the display means (symbol display device 41);
In gaming machines equipped with
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the data generating means includes a transparent value setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3815 in the VDP 135) for setting a transparent value corresponding to translucency for the projection data.

  According to the feature F1, since the transparency value corresponding to the semi-transparency is set after the projection data is created, the semi-transparent image display can be finally performed without setting the object data in the semi-transparent state. It becomes possible. If you create projection data after making the object data semi-transparent, the back side image part that you do not want to display as object data may be displayed. If you try to create projection data while avoiding this, Processing may be complicated. On the other hand, since it is possible to finally display a translucent image without setting the object data in a translucent state, the translucent image display can be suitably performed. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature F2. The data generating means is translucent to object data for displaying individual images (symbol display portions CH16 to CH18) for which a transparent value corresponding to the translucency set by the transparent value setting means is displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein no corresponding transparency value is set.

  According to the feature F2, since the object data is configured not to be in a semitransparent state, it is possible to prevent the back side image portion that is not originally displayed as the object data from being displayed. And since it is the structure which has the structure of the said characteristic F1 and sets the transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency with respect to projection data, a semi-transparent image display is performed, preventing the above inconveniences. Is possible.

Feature F3. The data generation means includes
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect character CH15, symbol display portions CH16 to CH18), predetermined projection data corresponding to some individual images of the plurality of individual images is created, and separately, the plurality of the plurality of individual images are displayed. Individual creation means (steps S3802, S3803, S3805, S3806, S3808, S3809, S3811 in the VDP 135) that creates the specific projection data corresponding to individual images not included in the predetermined projection data among the individual images. And a function of executing the process of step S3812),
Generation execution means (function to execute the process of step S3816 in the VDP 135) for setting the predetermined projection data in a mode corresponding to the transparency value in the storage area in which the specific projection data is set;
The gaming machine according to F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F3, a plurality of individual projection data can be created by simply creating a plurality of projection data and combining a plurality of projection data while setting a transparent value corresponding to semi-transparency for a part of the projection data. Images can be displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, and the contents of the overlapping portions of the back individual images can be reflected in the overlapping portions of the front individual images.

Feature F4. The individual creation means includes
Data creation means (steps S3802, S3805, S3808, and S3811 in the VDP 135) that sequentially creates each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1). Function to execute)
Means (steps S3803, S3806, S3809, and S3812 in the VDP 135) for writing the projection data created in the storage unit for projection data into the storage unit (first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5) is executed. Function)
The gaming machine according to Feature F3, comprising:

  According to the feature F4, in a configuration in which generation data is generated by synthesizing the projection data after generating a plurality of projection data, it is possible to consolidate the storage means as the projection data generation destination into the projection data storage means It becomes. As a result, it is not necessary to change the storage means of the creation destination when creating the projection data, so that the process design can be facilitated. In addition, since the storage unit for storing the projection data created in the projection data storage unit is provided, the created projection data can be stored separately until the synthesis is executed.

Feature F5. The individual creation means creates each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in a projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1),
The projection data storage means has a plurality of projection unit storage areas,
Each of these projection unit storage areas is configured to be able to set color information and transparency value information,
The individual creating means creates the predetermined projection data after setting the transparent value information corresponding to transparency as the transparent value information of each projection unit storage area in the projection data storage means, and displays the predetermined projection data in the predetermined projection data In the projection unit storage area in which data corresponding to the target individual image is written, transparent value information corresponding to opacity is set as transparency value information. In the other projection unit storage areas, the transparent value information is set as transparent value information. The game machine according to Feature F3 or F4, wherein information of a corresponding transparency value is maintained.

  According to the feature F5, the projection data is created in the projection data storage unit after the transparent value information corresponding to the transparency is set in each projection unit area in the projection data storage unit. In this case, it is possible to make the transparency value information of the portion where the individual image is not drawn transparent without performing post-processing after the creation of the projection data. As a result, even if the generated data is finally generated by simply superimposing a plurality of projection data, the data portion of the individual image to be projected in each projection data is overwritten by the blank data portion. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features F1 to F5, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means includes first predetermined image data (normal effect image data ED5) as image data for displaying a predetermined image (increase effect image EG6), and the first predetermined image data. Second predetermined image data (simple effect image data ED6) set with a low resolution is stored,
The display control means enlarges the second predetermined image data so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used even when the second predetermined image data is used. A game machine characterized by comprising image enlargement means (function to execute the processing of step S2109 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature G1, not only the first predetermined image data but also second predetermined image data whose resolution is set lower than that of the first predetermined image data is stored as image data for displaying the predetermined image. When the second predetermined image data is used, the second predetermined image data is enlarged and used so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used. Thus, the first predetermined image data is used when a predetermined image is displayed in a state where the image quality is high, and the second time when the time required for reading the image data needs to be shortened even when the image quality is deteriorated. It is possible to use predetermined image data. Therefore, it is possible to perform data setting for displaying a predetermined image in a manner according to the situation, and display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature G2. The time required for enlarging the second predetermined image data in the image enlarging means is larger than the difference between the processing time required for reading the first predetermined image data and the processing time required for reading the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine of feature G1, wherein the processing time is shorter.

  According to the feature G2, the processing time when the second predetermined image data is read and used after being enlarged can be made shorter than the processing time when the first predetermined image data is read and used. As a result, the second predetermined image data is used in a situation where the processing load is heavy, so that the predetermined image can be displayed even in a situation where the processing load is heavy.

Feature G3. The image enlarging means stores the enlarged image data after enlarging the second predetermined image data in a predetermined storage means (development buffer 81),
The display control means uses the enlarged image data stored in the predetermined storage means during a period of displaying the predetermined image using the second predetermined image data. A gaming machine according to G2.

  According to the feature G3, after the second predetermined image data is enlarged, the post-enlarged image data is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the processing when the second predetermined image data is used over a plurality of update timings. The load can be reduced.

  Feature G4. The display control means uses the first predetermined image data from a state in which the image data after enlargement by the image enlargement means of the second predetermined image data is used as image data for displaying the predetermined image. Any of the features G1 to G3, characterized in that it includes use target setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2015 to S2020 in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing the processing of step S2111 in the VDP 76). A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to switch from the situation in which the second predetermined image data is used to reduce the processing load to the situation in which the first predetermined image data is used to improve the image quality while continuing to display the predetermined image. It becomes.

  Feature G5. When the display of the predetermined image is started at a timing when the number of individual images displayed on the display unit increases, the use target setting unit, as the image data for displaying the predetermined image, The game machine according to Feature G4, wherein the image data for displaying the predetermined image is switched to the first predetermined image data.

  According to the feature G5, when the display of a predetermined image is started at the timing when the number of individual images increases, there is a possibility that the time required for reading the image data at the timing may be locally long. By displaying the predetermined image using the enlarged image data after the second predetermined image data is enlarged at the timing, it is possible to suppress the time required for the reading from being prolonged. On the other hand, by using the first predetermined image data after the timing, it is possible to read the first predetermined image data and improve the image quality of the predetermined image in a situation where the time required for reading the image data is sufficient. It becomes.

  Feature G6. When displaying the predetermined image using the first predetermined image data, the display control means changes the display mode of the predetermined image by using the first predetermined image data different at a plurality of update timings, and The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein when the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, a display mode of the predetermined image is not changed.

  According to the feature G6, when the predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, the display content can be prevented from being uniformed by changing the display mode of the predetermined image. When a predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, it is possible to prioritize the reduction in processing load.

  Feature G7. A plurality of the first predetermined image data are provided so that a display mode of the predetermined image can be changed over a plurality of update timings, and only one second predetermined image data is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

  According to the characteristic G7, since the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed by providing a plurality of the first predetermined image data, only the second predetermined image data is provided. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration when displaying a predetermined image using the predetermined image data.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7 Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the content of the image is updated at the update timing. Display control means (VDP135);
With
The data generation means displays a plurality of individual images including a first specific individual image (loop effect A character CH8) and a second specific individual image (loop effect B character CH9) on the display unit. , The information derivation process (interpolation display period process) is started to derive the first display information (coordinate data) necessary for changing the display mode of the first specific individual image, and the second specific information Derivation process execution means (a function for executing the interpolated display period process in the display CPU 131) for starting the execution of the information derivation process to derive the second display information necessary for changing the display mode of the individual image,
The derivation processing execution means derives predetermined display information that is one of the first display information and the second display information when the period from one update timing to the next update timing is a specific period. Execution of the information deriving process is started in a predetermined specific period, and the information deriving process for deriving specific display information which is the other of the first display information and the second display information is performed in the predetermined period A gaming machine that starts in the specific period after the specific period.

  According to the feature H1, in the situation where a plurality of individual images including the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image are displayed on the display unit, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is When changed, the start of derivation of the first display information necessary for changing the display mode and the start of derivation of the second display information are performed in different specific periods. This prevents an event that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period compared to a configuration in which the start of derivation of the first display information and the start of derivation of the second display information are performed in the same specific period. It becomes possible to. Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, and it is possible to suitably perform display control.

  Feature H2. The game according to claim H1, wherein the derivation process execution means starts execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information in the specific period next to the predetermined specific period. Machine.

  According to the feature H2, an event occurs in which the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period while minimizing the difference between the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information. It becomes possible not to do.

  Feature H3. When the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information is started, the display control means, even if the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information is not started, The game according to claim H1 or H2, wherein display using the predetermined display information is started on a side of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image on which the predetermined display information is to be used. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, even if the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information are intentionally shifted, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image This change can be started early.

Feature H4. The display control means includes a first specific operation display (interpolation display of the loop effect A character CH8) following the first predetermined operation display (the first loop effect mode of the loop effect A character CH8). The second specific individual image is displayed after the second predetermined action display (the first loop effect form of the loop effect B character CH9) and the second specific action display (the loop effect B character CH9). Update the content of the image to perform the interpolation display period mode)
The first display information is information for performing the first specific operation display, and the second display information is information for performing the second specific operation display. H1 to H3 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature H4, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the first specific individual image and Since each of the second specific individual images is configured to perform a specific action display following a predetermined action display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the content of the deviation is also a series of contents of the action display. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Feature H5. An operation mode of the first specific individual image is different from an operation mode of the second specific individual image at a timing of starting execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information. A gaming machine according to Feature H4.

  According to the feature H5, even if the specific operation display start timing of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the information derivation process is executed. Since the operation mode of the first specific individual image is different from the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the start timing, the difference in the start timing becomes inconspicuous due to the difference in the operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Feature H6. The operation mode of the first specific individual image at the timing when the first predetermined operation display ends is a predetermined mode, and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the timing when the second predetermined operation display ends is It is a predetermined aspect,
The gaming machine according to claim H4 or H5, wherein the predetermined display information is the first display information, and the specific display information is the second display information.

  According to the feature H6, since the information derivation process is started from either the first display information or the second display information in advance, the target to start the information derivation process is changed according to the situation. This simplifies the processing configuration in that it is not necessary to do so. Further, since the operation mode of each specific individual image at the timing when the predetermined operation display ends is determined, it has been determined in advance from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started. However, it is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the display contents from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H7. Based on the occurrence of a switching opportunity that occurs irregularly in a situation where the first specific individual image performs the first predetermined operation display and the second specific individual image performs the second predetermined operation display, The first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are started,
The derivation process executing means determines a destination start determination means (display) that determines a target to start the information derivation process first among the first display information and the second display information according to the timing at which the switching trigger occurs. A gaming machine according to Feature H4 or H5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing the processing of Step S2702 in the CPU 131).

  According to the feature H7, the display content can be diversified because the switching trigger from the situation where the predetermined action display is performed to the situation where the specific action display is performed irregularly occurs. In this case, since it is determined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started according to the timing when the switching opportunity occurs, it is specified in an order that makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. The operation display can be started.

Feature H8. The data generation means includes
Means for deriving information for causing the first specific individual image to display the first predetermined motion according to the first predetermined motion information (first animation data AD1 for A character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131) The function of executing the processing of S2407),
In accordance with first special action information (second animation data AD2 for A character) stored in advance, a first special action display (second loop effect mode of A character CH8 for loop effect) is performed on the first specific individual image. Means for deriving information (function to execute the process of step S2407 in the display CPU 131),
Means for deriving information for performing the second predetermined motion display on the second specific individual image according to the second predetermined motion information (first animation data AD3 for B character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131) The function of executing the processing of S2407),
In accordance with second special action information (second animation data AD4 for B character) stored in advance, a second special action display (second loop effect mode of B character CH9 for loop effect) is performed on the second specific individual image. Means for deriving information (function to execute the process of step S2407 in the display CPU 131),
With
The first specific operation display is performed after the first predetermined operation display is performed and before the first special operation display is performed,
The second specific action display is performed after the second predetermined action display is performed and before the second special action display is performed,
The derivation process execution means derives the first display information by executing the information derivation process using the first predetermined movement information and the first special movement information, and the second predetermined movement information and The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, wherein the second display information is derived by executing the information derivation process using the second special operation information.

  According to the feature H8, between each predetermined operation display and each special operation display, the specific operation display is performed based on the information derived using the predetermined operation information and the special operation information stored in advance, It is possible to smoothly change the display content from the state where the predetermined operation display is performed to the state where the special operation display is performed while suppressing the amount of information necessary to store information in advance. However, if processing for deriving display information using predetermined operation information and special operation information is performed together in one specific period, the processing load may become extremely large. Since the derivation of display information is started in different specific periods between the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152);
With
The data generation means reads out and uses color defining image data (background texture data GTD1) having a plurality of unit data associated with numerical information defining color information from the display storage means (memory module 133). The generation data is generated by
The display storage means stores in advance adjustment data (first refraction texture data GTD2, second refraction texture data GTD3) having a plurality of the unit data in the same manner as the color defining image data,
The data generation means uses numerical information derived from the unit data of the adjustment data as predetermined adjustment information different from the color information, so that the corresponding individual image displayed using the color defining image data is displayed. A gaming machine comprising content adjusting means for adjusting display content (function for executing the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135).

  According to the feature I1, since the display content of the corresponding individual image is adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, the display content can be diversified while using the same color-defined image data. In this case, the predetermined adjustment information is derived by using adjustment data having a plurality of unit data in the same manner as the color defining image data. As a result, it is possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as the same data as the color stipulated image data. Compared to a configuration in which adjustment data is prepared as different data, it is possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image while sharing the processing for reading the data and the processing for temporarily storing the data after the reading. . Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

Feature I2. The unit data includes a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The feature adjustment unit specifies the predetermined adjustment information by using numerical information derived from a plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I2, it is possible to finely control the content of the predetermined adjustment information by deriving the predetermined adjustment information using a plurality of pieces of base color correspondence information set in the unit data of the adjustment data. .

Feature I3. The unit data includes a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjusting means specifies the predetermined adjustment information using numerical information derived from some data among a plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2.

  According to the feature I3, all the base color correspondence data is used by deriving predetermined adjustment information using a part of the plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. Thus, the processing load for deriving the predetermined adjustment information can be reduced as compared with the configuration for deriving the predetermined adjustment information.

Feature I4. The data generation means includes
An arrangement unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135) that arranges object data that is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space;
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 135);
A drawing setting unit that projects the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generates generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (performs the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135) Function)
Have
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the color defining image data is texture data set for the object data.

  According to the feature I4, it is possible to derive predetermined adjustment information using adjustment data prepared as texture data.

  Feature I5. The game according to claim I4, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the unit data in the texture data, rather than adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. Machine.

  According to the feature I5, since the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted instead of adjusting the content of the object data using the predetermined adjustment information, the target to be adjusted is not two-dimensional information but two-dimensional information. It becomes possible to use information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the adjustment.

  Feature I6. The gaming machine according to the characteristic I5, wherein the content adjusting unit adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before setting the object data.

  According to the feature I6, the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information can be performed without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set as the object data, so that the adjustment can be easily performed.

  Feature I7. In any one of the characteristics I1 to I6, the content adjustment unit causes the corresponding individual image displayed using the color-defining image data to be distorted by using the predetermined adjustment information. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to perform distortion display of the corresponding individual image using the adjustment data stored in the display storage unit as data similar to the color defining image data.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features I1 to I7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7 are used. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Arranging means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135) The function of executing the process of step S2306 in FIG. 2) and projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Generation data storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing the generated data generated by the data generation means having drawing setting means (function to execute the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135);
Display control means (VDP135) for causing the display means (symbol display device 41) to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generating means does not adjust the content of the object data (background plate-like object data GSD) based on the predetermined adjustment information, but texture data (background texture data GTD1) set for the object data. Is adjusted based on the predetermined adjustment information to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image displayed using the object data and texture data (the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135 is executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature J1, since the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted instead of adjusting the content of the object data using the predetermined adjustment information, the adjustment target is not 3D information but 2D. It becomes possible to use information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the adjustment. Therefore, display control can be suitably performed.

  Feature J2. The game machine according to Feature J1, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before setting the object data.

  According to the feature J2, the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information can be performed without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set as the object data, so that the adjustment can be easily performed.

  Note that for any one of the configurations of the features J1 to J2, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature group J can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. First control means (sound light side MPU 62) for determining the execution content of the production;
Second control means (display CPU 72) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means;
With
When a predetermined execution opportunity occurs, the effect execution means (preliminary display) is executed in the effect execution means,
The opportunity corresponding effect includes a plurality of effect elements (contents of the second type) in which the content to be changed that is at least one of execution presence and content changes.
The execution pattern of the opportunity corresponding effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the contents to be changed for the plurality of effect elements,
When transmitting the transmission information for executing the opportunity corresponding effect, the first control means corresponds to the corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2) corresponding to the variation target contents of a predetermined effect element. , The third command data CD3) and the corresponding transmission information (the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, the third command data CD3) corresponding to the contents to be changed of other effect elements and transmitted. A gaming machine comprising a transmission means (function for executing a command selection process in the sound light side MPU 62).

  According to the feature K1, since the execution pattern of the opportunity corresponding effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the contents to be varied for the plurality of effect elements, the effect content of the opportunity corresponding effect can be diversified. In this case, since the first corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variation target content of the predetermined effect element and the second corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variation target content of the other effect element are transmitted separately, Even if the number of effect elements is increased or decreased, or the contents to be changed are changed, it is only necessary to change the corresponding transmission information in units of the corresponding effect elements, so that the design of transmission information can be facilitated. .

  Feature K2. Each of the predetermined effect element and the other effect elements determines the effect content to be executed simultaneously, The gaming machine according to the feature K1.

  According to the feature K2, even if there are a plurality of effect elements that determine the effect contents to be executed at the same time, the corresponding transmission information for causing the second control means to specify the contents to be changed of the effect elements is different for each effect element type. Therefore, the design of transmission information can be facilitated.

  Feature K3. The first control means transmits end transmission information (end command) indicating that all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity response effect is transmitted (end transmission means (step S509 in the sound light side MPU 62). A game machine according to the feature K1 or K2.

  According to the feature K3, the end transmission information is transmitted when all of the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity response effect is transmitted in the configuration in which the corresponding transmission information is transmitted in units of effect elements. The second control means can recognize that the transmission of all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity response effect has been completed without fixing the number of effect elements included in the event response effect. Become.

Feature K4. The second control means includes
Storage execution means for storing the received corresponding transmission information in the information storage means (command storage buffer 101) (function for executing command interrupt processing in the display CPU 72);
Reference information for setting reference information (execution target table) used to execute the trigger corresponding effect corresponding to a plurality of corresponding transmission information stored in the information storage means when the end transmission information is received Setting means (function for executing command response processing in the display CPU 72);
The gaming machine according to Feature K3, comprising:

  According to the feature K4, the second control unit is configured to set the reference information used to execute the trigger response effect after receiving all the corresponding transmission information necessary to execute the trigger response effect. Instead of setting the reference information corresponding to each variation target content of the production element, it is possible to set one reference information corresponding to all the variation target content of all the production elements.

  Feature K5. The correspondence transmission information includes outline information (first command data CD1) for specifying the contents of the outline of the effect element corresponding to the correspondence transmission information, and branch contents included in the contents of the outline corresponding to the outline information. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, including branch information (second command data CD2 and third command data CD3) for specifying which of them is executed.

  According to the feature K5, even one piece of corresponding transmission information is divided into broad frame information and branch information, so that the design of one piece of correspondence transmission information can be facilitated.

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the second control means grasps different contents from the branch information according to the contents of the outline information even if the contents of the same branch information are the same.

  According to the feature K6, since the branch information is used in common among a plurality of pieces of corresponding transmission information, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for storing the transmission correspondence information in advance.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features K1 to K6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature K group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which control corresponding to the command is executed by another control means using a command transmitted from one control means.

  For example, in a pachinko machine, the execution control of the production is performed by the production control unit based on the command transmitted from the main control unit that controls the progress of the game, or the one production control unit. There is known a configuration in which production execution control is performed by another production control means based on the command.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of transmission information transmitted from one control unit to another control unit in order to execute an effect. There is room for improvement.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Calculation execution means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) for starting calculation processing using the calculation information (execution target table) when a start trigger occurs;
Result utilization means (a function for executing the process of step S609 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76) that executes the specific process using the calculation result of the calculation process;
With
When the calculation execution means ends the calculation process in the middle of the calculation process in a predetermined execution time and ends the calculation process in the middle, the calculation execution means Re-execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S606, S610, and S916 in the display CPU 72) for executing the calculation process using the calculation information set as the use target at the execution time is provided. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature L1, when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle. Therefore, the processing time of the arithmetic processing fluctuates and execution of other processing is greatly limited. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event of being done. In addition, when the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, in the next execution processing, the arithmetic processing using the calculation information that is the target of use in the arithmetic processing terminated in the middle is executed again. As a result, even if the calculation process can be terminated halfway, it is possible to complete the execution of the calculation process using each calculation information.

  Feature L2. The game according to Feature L1, wherein the re-execution means resumes the arithmetic processing from the content that was halfway completed at the predetermined execution time in the next execution time with respect to the predetermined execution time. Machine.

  According to the feature L2, when the calculation process using the calculation information that is the target of use in the previous execution time is executed again, the calculation process is restarted from the content that was completed in the previous execution time. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the time required to end the arithmetic processing resumed in a new execution time.

Feature L3. The arithmetic processing includes a plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing (step S902, step S903, step S906, step S909, step S912 to step S914), and the plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing are sequentially executed in each execution time of the arithmetic processing. It is a target configuration,
The game machine according to Feature L2, wherein the calculation execution means ends the current calculation process after the completion of the individual calculation process even if the condition for termination is satisfied during the execution of the individual calculation process. .

  According to the feature L3, even if the calculation process is terminated in the middle, it is not terminated in the middle of the individual calculation process. Therefore, the information setting process for resuming the calculation process from the middle is complicated. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature L4. The arithmetic processing is executed as a part of periodic processing (V interrupt processing) in which an execution condition is periodically satisfied,
The game according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the calculation execution unit ends the calculation process in the middle when the execution condition is satisfied as the end condition in the middle of the calculation process. Machine.

  According to the feature L4, it is possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each calculation information while ensuring the periodic execution of the periodic processing.

  Feature L5. The calculation execution means is configured to execute the predetermined event when a priority event (set of a notification execution target table) occurs even when the calculation process is terminated in the predetermined execution time. In the next execution time with respect to the execution time, the calculation using the calculation information corresponding to the priority event is used instead of using the calculation information set as a use target in the predetermined execution time. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the processing is executed.

  According to the feature L5, since the execution of the arithmetic process using the calculation information corresponding to the priority event is prioritized over the resumption of the arithmetic process using the calculation information in the arithmetic process terminated in the middle, the priority event As described above, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while not delaying the execution of the calculation process using the calculation information corresponding to.

  Feature L6. The specific control means having the arithmetic execution means is a re-execution corresponding transmission means (display) that transmits re-execution correspondence information (delay command) when the re-execution setting of the arithmetic processing is to be performed by the re-execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing the process of step S611 in the CPU 72).

  According to the feature L6, the re-execution correspondence information is transmitted when the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time is ended halfway and the arithmetic processing is executed again in the next execution time. Operations other than can be made to correspond to re-execution of the arithmetic processing.

Feature L7. In addition to the specific control means, a predetermined control means (sound light side MPU 62) is provided,
The predetermined control means includes a process adjustment means (a function for executing a display side command corresponding process in the sound light side MPU 62) that adjusts the execution content of the predetermined process when the re-execution correspondence information is received. The gaming machine according to Feature L6.

  According to the feature L7, when the re-execution of the arithmetic process is performed, the execution content of the predetermined process in the predetermined control unit is adjusted, so that the process content of the specific process can be associated with the process content of the predetermined process. It becomes.

Feature L8. The result use means performs execution control of the effect in the specific effect execution means (symbol display device 41) using the calculation result of the calculation process as the specific process,
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the predetermined control means performs execution control of a predetermined effect execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) as the predetermined process.

  According to the feature L8, when the derivation of the calculation result is delayed in the calculation process executed for performing the execution control of the effect in the specific effect executing means, the execution is performed for performing the execution control of the effect in the predetermined effect executing means. Since the processing content of the predetermined processing is also adjusted, it is possible to make the contents of the effects in each effect executing means correspond to each other.

  Feature L9. The result use means, when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is ended in the middle, the arithmetic operation in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein the specific process is executed using a calculation result of the process.

  According to the feature L9, when the calculation process is terminated halfway, the specific process is not executed using the contents during the calculation, but the calculation result of the calculation process completed before that Since the specific process is executed using the, it is possible to prevent the execution contents of the specific process from becoming abnormal contents.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. Any one or a plurality of configurations of features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature L group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control means in which an element such as a memory in which a CPU is mounted and a control program is stored is mounted, and a game is played through execution of arithmetic processing in the control means. Controls are made to enable this. A configuration is also known in which the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control unit, but are mounted on the control unit in an integrated state.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, there is a demand for a configuration that can suitably execute arithmetic processing in the control means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Symbol display apparatus, 44 ... Display light emission part, 45 ... Speaker part, 62 ... Sound light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81 ... Buffer for expansion | deployment, 82 ... Frame buffer, 93 ... Video decoder, 101 ... Command storage buffer, 121 ... Unit area, 122 ... Pixel, 131 ... Display CPU, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... Frame buffer, 151 ... Geometry operation unit, 152 ... Rendering unit, 169 ... Coordinate calculation area, ABD1 to ABD50 ... Bone data, AD1 to AD4 ... Animation data, BF1 ... Drawing buffer, BF2 to BF5 ... Storage buffer, BG ... Ground image, BGD ... Ground object data , BMD ... Base video data, BOD1-B D50 ... bone data, BSD ... plane shadow plate-like object data, BST1 ... first plane shadow texture data, BST2 ... second plane shadow texture data, BTD1 ... texture data, BTD2 ... set texture data, CD1 to CD3 ... command data, CH1 ... color change effect character, CH2 ... effect effect character, CH8 ... loop effect A character, CH9 ... loop effect B character, CH10 ... bone display character, CH11 ... effect character, CH12 ... Shadow image, CH13 ... effect character, CH14 ... shadow image, CH15 ... effect character, CH16-CH18 ... design display, CHG1-CHG5 ... collective unit character, CR ... color change target area, ED5 ... normal effect image data ED6 ... Easy-effect image data, EG2 ... effect image, EG6 ... Increase effect image, FRD1 ... skeleton data, FRD2 ... collection skeleton data, GSD ... background plate-like object data, GTD1 ... background texture data, GTD2, GTD3 ... Refraction texture data, P ... Display surface, PD1 to PD3 ... Parts image data, SG ... Stair image, SGD ... Stair object data, SKD1 ... Skin data, SKD2 ... Assembly skin data, SSD ... Plate for step shadow Object data.

Claims (2)

Arrangement means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space; viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space; and the object data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. A generation data storage means for storing the generation data generated by the data generation means having a drawing setting means for projecting and generating generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane;
Display control means for causing the display means to display an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The arrangement means displays the corresponding image when displaying the corresponding image that is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image so as to overlap a part of the second individual image. Corresponding object data that is object data is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from object data for displaying the second individual image ,
The data generation means includes texture setting means for setting texture data for the object data,
The texture setting means, when the display position of the first individual image is changed, the correspondence of the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed A gaming machine comprising a setting position changing means for changing a setting position relationship with respect to object data . The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images